JP2020058567A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 can set a jackpot probability in which a jackpot lottery results in a jackpot from among a plurality of mutually different jackpot probabilities. An MPU 41 displays a game setting value regarding a jackpot probability on a special main display part 37a. An MPU 51 moves an accumulation box 39 for disabling or making difficult visual recognition of a game setting value displayed on the special main display part 37a such that at least one portion of the game setting value can be visually recognized in entry of game balls into a special out ball port 363.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 73

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines have a plurality of gaming setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot drawing. In addition, the game set value may be suggested to the player by a predetermined effect.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-024234

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of interest and interest in the game and to improve the player's willingness to play.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of interest and interest in the game and improving the player's willingness to play the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game set value, lottery number per unit, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc.) which is an index indicating the payout performance,
Performance information display means (37a) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412),
Performance information display control means (41) for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a),
A visibility limiting means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view;
When the specific condition is satisfied, the visual recognition restriction means (39, 39A) is controlled to visually recognize at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a). 51),
It is characterized by including.

The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is a development view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a development view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device. The figure which shows typically an example of the performance information display apparatus of a main controller. The figure which shows the example of a display on the performance display monitor of a performance information display device. The figure which shows the example of a display in the game setting value display part of a performance information display device. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interruption process performed with a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the starting winning process performed by the main timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st hold command setting process performed by the start winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variable game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed by the variation game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation start process performed by the variation game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting value change process performed by the main process of FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of specific performance information update processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 16. The figure which shows an example of the base information updated by the specific performance information update process of FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the voice lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation detection process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the operation data table which shows the relationship between an operation detection pattern and an operation situation. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command determination process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 31. The figure which shows an example of the production pattern classification table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the payout performance suggestion image display process performed by the command determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the game setting value suggestion character classification which suggests a game setting value. The figure which shows an example of the game setting value suggestion character selection table used by the payout performance suggestion image display processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the character mode selection table used by the payout performance suggestion image display processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the character mode selection table used by the payout performance suggestion image display processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the payout performance suggestion image displayed on the sub image display part in a variation game. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process performed by the command determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening basic effect selection table used by the opening effect determination process performed by the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the rank suggestion image classification which suggests the rank of the number of times of unit jackpot lottery. The figure which shows an example of the unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table used by the opening production determination process. The figure which shows an example of the opening screen in a jackpot game. The figure which shows an example of the ending basic effect selection table and the unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table which are used in the ending effect determination process executed in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the ending screen in a jackpot game. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used by the opening / closing execution mode effect determination processing executed by the jackpot game effect determination processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used by the opening / closing execution mode effect determination processing. The figure which shows an example of the round game character selection table and unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table which are used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process. The figure which shows an example of the round game screen of the opening and closing execution mode in a jackpot game. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game production process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The figure which shows the other example of the payout performance suggestion image in a variation game. The figure which shows the other example of the payout performance suggestion image in a variation game. The figure which shows the other example of the round game screen of the opening / closing execution mode in a jackpot game. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command determination process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of command determination processing. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a jackpot game production process. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the round game production start process performed by the jackpot game production process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the payout performance suggestion image display process performed by the jackpot game production process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the payout performance suggestion image display processing in the command determination processing performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the point table and total point rank corresponding | compatible table used by the payout performance suggestion image display process. The figure which shows an example of the total point suggestion character selection table referred by the payout performance suggestion image display processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the payout performance suggestion image display process in the command determination process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 64 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an expected value rank correspondence table, and FIG. 64 (B) is a diagram showing an example of an expected value rank suggestion character selection table used in the payout performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 63. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. The front view which expands and shows the principal part of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 66 is a perspective view showing an example of a clune device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 65. 68A is a sectional view taken along the line X1-X1 in FIG. 67, and FIG. 68B is a sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 in FIG. 69 (A) is a front view showing the retention box and its surroundings when the retention box is at the upper limit position, FIG. 69 (B) is a vertical sectional view of FIG. 69 (A), and FIG. 69 (C) is FIG. 69 ( Sectional drawing which follows the X3-X3 cutting line of A). FIG. 70 (A) is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (B) showing the retention box and its surroundings when the retention box is at the lower limit position, and FIG. 70 (B) is the retention box when the retention box is at the lower limit position. FIG. 69 (C) is a cross-sectional view showing the periphery of the retention box and its periphery, and FIG. 70 (C) shows the retention box and its periphery when the retention box is at an intermediate position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. 70D is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69D, and FIG. 70D is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69C illustrating the retention box and its periphery when the retention box is at the intermediate position. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 65. 72A is a front view showing an example of a special main display section, and FIG. 72B is a view showing a display example of the special main display section. The figure which shows typically the visual recognition state of the special main display part in downward movement level 0-2. 74 (A) and 74 (A) are diagrams schematically showing the visual recognition state of the special main display portion at the lower movement levels 3 and 4, and FIG. 74 (C) is the number of staying game balls in the staying box and the staying box. The figure which shows the relationship with the downward movement level. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the gaming machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 75. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a stay box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a stay box return process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 75. FIG. The front view which shows an example of the clune device of the game machine and its periphery which concern on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. Sectional drawing which follows the X4-X4 cutting line of FIG. 81 (A) is a perspective view showing an example of the special main display section and the translucent monitor, and FIG. 81 (B) shows an example of the relationship between the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor and the visual confirmation state of the special main display section. FIG. 81C is a diagram showing the relationship between the special out-ball count number and the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 82. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the visual recognition control process performed by the command determination process of FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of light-shielding control processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 82. The figure which shows the other example of the relationship between a visual recognition level and the visual recognition state of a special main display part. FIG. 87 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between a plurality of areas and the visual recognition state of the special main display unit, and FIG. 87 (B) is another example of the relationship between the visual recognition level and the visual recognition state of the special main display unit. FIG. The front view which expands and shows the principal part of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X5-X5 of FIG. 88. 89 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 89 when the forced ejection member is in the operating position. A cross-sectional view of a region including a stay box and a special main display portion in a game machine. 92 (A) and 92 (B) are diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the lower movement level of the retention box and the output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor and the lower limit position detection sensor, and FIG. 92 (C) is a translucent monitor. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a visual recognition control state of a special main display section according to FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the stay box operation check process performed with an audio lamp control device. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of error processing executed in the stay box operation check process of FIG. 94. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a stay box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a stay box return process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 75. FIG.

  Hereinafter, the first to fourth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. In addition, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 51.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are exploded views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of a gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-rear, left-right and up-down expressions used in this embodiment are defined by the front-rear direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. It is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 14. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine, but other types of gaming machines such as a spinning-body gaming machine (slot machine), an arrange-ball gaming machine, and a jiyan ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention can be applied to a game machine.

[Structure of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 is provided with operation buttons 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination portion 27, and the like.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 5) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether a pressing operation is performed. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (with or without operation). The operation button 20 is executed in response to an operation on the operation button 20 by the player in a predetermined specific period in the variable game effect executed in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is clearly shown to the player. It is operated to execute the operation button effect.

  The operation button 20 is not limited to being installed in front of the upper plate 23 but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more.

  Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives the operation of the touch key by the player is provided. The operation button 20 may be equipped with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 in the variable game effect is reflected in the operation button effect and the like.

  The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle that a player operates to fire a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is played by launching a game ball from a game ball launching mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the player operates the firing handle 22, the game ball firing mechanism 32 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 sec.

  The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, and stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 to be described later, and the stored game balls are aligned in one row. It is used to guide the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used to store the excess game balls in the upper plate 23.

  The panel 25 is colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speaker 26 is a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end of the front frame 11, and executes a voice output effect of outputting a voice. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the electric decoration section 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect in a blinking manner such as a lighting color, lighting or extinction.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. Note that in FIG. 2, the description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of the illustration.

  The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, and an out opening 318. A variable display unit 34 and a main display section 37 are provided.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending out the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. To be done.

  Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is transferred to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that launches the game balls supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is drive-controlled according to the operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, and the gaming ball is launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 to the gaming board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches the game ball using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are formed with openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. Then, on the back surface side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entry of the game ball corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 5) are provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 to be described later. Is detected by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 5). The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 5) that can individually detect the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball will pass through the through gate 317 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, that is, when it is hitting to the right.

  The ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 5) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 are stored in the main control unit 331. Is entered. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls according to the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of a game ball entering by the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as a winning. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 35. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of shot game balls launched by the game ball launch mechanism 32 onto the game board 31. In addition, although the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, they are arbitrary sensors capable of individually detecting the incoming ball of the game ball by another detection method. May be.

  In addition, the second winning port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction of entering a game ball into the second winning port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 315 by opening the electric winning object 315b, and entering the game ball into the second winning opening 315 by closing the electric winning object 315b. The ball is limited.

  Further, the variable winning a prize opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 316b for switching whether or not there is a restriction of entering a game ball into the variable winning a prize opening 316. The opening / closing door 316b is opened / closed by a driving unit such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening / closing door 316b allows the game ball to enter the variable winning port 316, and the opening / closing door 316b closes to restrict the entering of the game ball to the variable winning port 316. It

  In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314a or the entry sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 carries out a jackpot lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In addition, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entry sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general prize hole 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first prize hole 314 or the second prize hole 315 is 3, and the variable prize hole 316 is entered. The number of prize balls in the case of doing is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a big hit, it shifts to a big hit game state (special game state) and the variable winning a prize port 316 is opened. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 or 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

  In addition, when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, the jackpot lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a win, the predetermined jackpot gaming state, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, is entered. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state), and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot gaming state is a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning port 316 is opened five times until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number (eg, 9) or more gaming balls are won in the variable winning port 316. It is a game state including the open / close execution mode to be performed. The 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that includes an open / close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and it is expected that a larger amount of prize balls will be paid out than in the 5R jackpot gaming state, rather than in the 5R jackpot gaming state. This is a game state that is advantageous to the player.

  The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display portion 341 such as a liquid crystal display which is arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display portion 341, a symbol variation display and a variation game according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the entry into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. Various displays such as effect display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display unit of the present invention. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

  For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers “1” to “9” in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, other characters or sub-designs such as designs may be displayed between the main designs. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and the types of main symbols are 9 types of "1" to "9".

  In the gaming machine 10, in the variation game, after the preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped. . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols are varied along a preset variation direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of main symbols is stopped in order. Then, when the variation of the main symbols in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the symbol variation display ends.

  When the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is finished, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are lined up on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol indicates or suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability jackpot", "16R probability jackpot" or "5R regular jackpot", the state where the main symbols of the same symbol are lined up on the activated line is displayed, and it is clearly a jackpot. To be done. Further, the jackpot type may be clearly indicated by a combination of main symbols on the activated line, but it is not always explicitly indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", a symbol combination of 16R probability variation jackpot set among the main symbols is set, for example, "777" symbol combination is lined up on the activated line. Is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than “777” are lined up on the activated line is displayed. If the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", a state in which the symbol combinations such as "333" set in advance as the symbol combination showing the 5R probability variable jackpot are displayed in the activated line is displayed. Or, a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than the symbol combinations showing the 16R certainty variation jackpot or the 5R certainty variation jackpot such as “777” and “333” are arranged in the activated line is displayed. If the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", it is set as a symbol combination indicating a regular jackpot in advance in the main symbols, for example, a combination other than a symbol indicating a probability jackpot such as "222" or "444". The state where the same combination of symbols is lined up on the activated line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, a state in which a combination of different main symbols is lined up on the activated line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

  Further, in the symbol display portion 341, along with the variable display of the main symbol in the variable game, a variable game effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is displayed. If the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", a big winning symbol combination other than the main symbol combination showing the 16R probability variable jackpot is displayed on the activated line, 5R probability variable jackpot as the variable game effect. Alternatively, a suggestion effect suggesting that it is a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is the 16R probability variation jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the result of lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", when a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination showing the probability variation jackpot are lined up on the activated line is displayed, as a variable game effect, 5R normal jackpot. The suggestion production that suggests that is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is the 5R certainty variation jackpot is executed.

  Furthermore, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display portion 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

  A sub-image display unit 38 such as a liquid crystal display is provided on the front left side area of the symbol display unit 341. In this sub-image display unit 38, a game effect is executed together with the symbol display unit 341 in a variable game or a jackpot game. Further, in the sub-image display unit 38, an effect that suggests to the player information (performance information) regarding payout performance in a variable game or a jackpot game is executed. Although details of the performance information will be described later, the performance information includes, for example, game setting values, unit jackpot lottery number information, base information, continuous character ratio information, character ratio information, and the like. The sub image display unit 38 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, etc., or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

  Further, it is conceivable to provide the game board 31 with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316, for example. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. Accordingly, when an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316 using the magnet is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal activity. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect an illegal act in the case where an act of improperly inputting a radio wave into the admission sensors 314a and 315a and causing a misdetection of a game ball to enter. The radio wave sensor can detect a radio wave of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

  The main display section 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374 arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31. The LED pair 371 displays the result of the lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b in the main control unit 331 as a combination (lighting pattern) of turning on and off, triggered by the winning of the through gate 317. On the 7-segment display 372, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner with the winning of the first winning opening 314 as a trigger, and the symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. On the 7-segment display 373, the symbols are variably displayed with the winning of the second winning opening 315 as a trigger, and the symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the number N and the number M of variable displays, which are generated due to the winning of the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, are displayed by a lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls of the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout device 132. The firing control device 8 controls the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation of the firing handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the electric power to a control device and a driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 5, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of a game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main controller 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

  The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. Further, the MPU 41 has a ROM 411 and a RAM 412 built therein. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the ball input sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, the main display section 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a ball in the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a. To judge. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 35. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, the power supply control device 9, and the like.

  Then, the MPU 41, to the voice lamp control device 5, a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, a game set value. It outputs commands such as change command and unit jackpot lottery number update command.

  The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information about the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. 19 described later, based on the information stored in the pending storage area 412b described later when starting the symbol variation display by the main display unit 37. It The fluctuation pattern command may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of only the fluctuation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

  The first hold command and the second hold command, when the number N of reservations or the number M of reservations stored in a holding storage area 412b to be described later increases, the lottery result, the variation pattern in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold, and the variation pattern, This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number N of holdings or the number M of holdings. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described later when the hold number N or the hold number M increases (see FIG. 15 described later). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process).

  The shift command indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area RB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 when the holding number N or the holding number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the hit / miss information has been shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG. 18 described later.

  The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and when the jackpot gaming state shifts to FIG. It is set in the game state transition process in the main process of. Further, the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game will start. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 receives the jackpot game start command to start the jackpot game. Not only that, but also that the opening will start. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the audio lamp control device 5 may be notified that the opening is started by the opening start command.

  The round game start command is a command for starting each round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game and notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of round number information indicating what round the round game is. , Is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 16 described later. In the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to understand that the opening ends and the opening / closing execution mode is started by the round game start command, but the opening end command is set at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command, Alternatively, the opening / closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening / closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5.

  The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is over, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 16 described later.

  The game set value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the change of the game set value and the changed game set value, and step S1710 in the game set value change process of FIG. 20 described later. Is set in.

  The unit jackpot lottery number update command is for a certain number of minus difference balls (for example, minus 250 balls) in the normal game state (low probability mode but not high frequency support mode) to the first winning opening 314. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of times the symbol variable display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display portion 37 has been executed (the number of times the jackpot lottery has been received) in response to the winning of a prize. It is updated in step S1805 in the performance information update process.

  Although commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, their description will be omitted.

  Further, the main control unit 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit and a frequency dividing circuit as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of a main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

  In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 causes the main timer interrupt (to be described later) each time the clock signal rises (or falls). It is assumed that the embedded process is activated and executed. The oscillating circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply the operation clock of the control main body in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery or the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the electric power combination hold area 412c of the RAM 412 to perform the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used in the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used in determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used in determining the out-of-class type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variation type counter CS1 for determining a variation display time in the main display portion 37 and the symbol display portion 341. Be done. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, an ordinary hit random number counter C4 used in a lottery to determine whether or not the electric prize 315b of the second winning opening 315 is placed in the electric power open state, and an initial value setting of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. A normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for Hereinafter, in the case of collectively explaining the plurality of types of counters, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching the preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the jackpot lottery and the variable display time are set.

  The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA, and the type of variable game that the 7-segment display 372 variably displays and stops is called the first special symbol game. is there. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB, and the type of the variable game that the 7-segment display 373 displays in a variable and stopped manner may be referred to as a second special symbol game. is there.

  When a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as win / fail information used in the lottery, and is stored in any of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as win / loss information used in the lottery, and is stored in any of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. The acquisition processing of the hit / miss information is executed by the MPU 41 that functions as the determination unit of the present invention by executing the processing according to the control program. In addition, the lottery counters 412a (such as the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1) are individually associated with the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB. May be provided.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 has the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA of the first holding storage area REA. It is stored in any of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reserve storage area REB.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery for the variable game executed based on the winning / disabling information stored in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the win / fail information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. Stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAA, the number of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 in which the hit / miss information is stored is stored as the number of holding N.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the win / fail information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. It is stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAB, the number of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 in which the hit / miss information is stored is stored as the number of holdings M.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first winning area 314 is formed by a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum holding numbers of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. It is possible to hold up to four pieces of winning / losing information as winning history to the second winning port 315.

  It should be noted that it is conceivable as another embodiment that a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common to the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, and in this case as well, up to a total of eight holding areas are provided. It is possible to hold the win / loss information as the winning history. The storage process of the hit / miss information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

  The execution area AE is the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA or the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display portion 37 and the symbol display portion 341 is started. This is a storage area used for moving the hit / nozzle information stored in. Specifically, the hit / fail information of the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the hit / fail information does not exist in the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB. When the number of reserved storage areas NAB is 0, the hit / fail information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  The difference between the number M of reservations stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the first holding storage area REA and the number N of holdings stored in the number-of-holding storage area NAB of the second holding storage area REB is 2 or more. In such a case, the value of the holding area having the larger number may be preferentially moved to the execution area AE as another embodiment. Further, it may be considered as another embodiment that the hit / miss information of the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA and the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like on the basis of the numerical value information stored in the execution area AE as the winning / retiring information at the start of one variation game. At this time, when the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the hit / miss information stored in the second holding area REA2 is shifted to the first holding area REA1, The hit / fail information stored in the hold area REA3 shifts to the second hold area REA2, and the hit / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REA4 shifts to the third hold area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the hit / fail information stored in the second holding area REB2 is shifted to the first holding area REB1, and the third holding area REB1 is held. The hit / fail information stored in the area REB3 shifts to the second holding area REB2, and the hit / fail information stored in the fourth holding area REB4 shifts to the third holding area REB3.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 637, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  The value of the random number that is a big hit is set by the winning / losing table stored in the winning / losing table storage area of the ROM 411 in correspondence with the low probability mode and the high probability mode that is the probability variation gaming state. Here, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode hit / loss table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode hit / miss table corresponding to the high probability mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 7 (A) and FIG. 7 (B), the probability (big hit probability) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit as the low probability mode win / loss table and the high probability mode win / loss table, respectively, is set as the game setting value. A plurality of different win / loss tables are provided accordingly. The low probability mode win / loss table and the high probability mode win / loss table each include four win / loss tables corresponding to the four game setting values 1 to 4. In the order of the game setting value 4, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2 and the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is high, which is advantageous to the player.

  In the game setting value 1, out of the 65536 random number values of 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode hit / miss table, and high. There are 824 (0 to 823) probability table hit / miss tables. That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1 / 318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/79. 5 (824/65536).

  In the game setting value 2, out of the 65536 random number values from 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 213 (0 to 212) and high for the low probability mode hit / miss table. There are 852 (0 to 851) probability mode hit / miss tables. That is, at the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1 / 307.7 (213/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/76. 9 (852/65536).

  In the game setting value 3, out of the 65536 random number values of 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 220 (0 to 219) and high for the low probability mode win / loss table. There are 880 (0 to 879) probability table hit / miss tables. That is, in the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1 / 297.9 (220/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/74. 5 (880/65536).

  In the game setting value 4, out of the 65536 random number values of 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 227 (0 to 226) and high for the low probability mode hit / miss table. There are 908 (0 to 907) probability table hit / miss tables. That is, with the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1 / 288.7 (227/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 1/72. 2 (908/65536).

  In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value which is a jackpot winning result, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is missed.

  Here, in the low-probability mode hit / miss table and the high-probability mode hit / miss table, the random numbers that result in a big hit in the big hit lottery between the same game setting values are common, but it is also possible that the random numbers that become a big hit are not common. To be Further, the random numbers to be won as a jackpot may not be continuous values but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

  Further, four low probability mode win / loss tables and high probability mode win / loss tables are provided in accordance with four-stage game settings, but at least one win / loss table for each mode is sufficient. That is, the game setting is not limited to four stages. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low probability mode hit / miss tables corresponding to a plurality of stages of game settings, while providing one high probability mode hit / miss table. That is, it is possible to set a plurality of stages for the low-probability mode and make the jackpot probability uniform without providing a stepwise game setting for the high-probability mode. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode may be uniform, and a plurality of stages of game settings may be provided for the high-probability mode.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 19 and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. In the gaming machine 10, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411 sets the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types, the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot.

  Here, FIG. 7C is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 7C, in the case where the type of the variation game is the first special symbol game triggered by the winning of the first winning hole 314, the number of random numbers that are the 5R probability variation jackpot is 0 to 10 The number of random numbers that is a 16R probability variation jackpot is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that is a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by the winning of the second winning opening 315, the number of random numbers that are 5R probability variable jackpots is 5 from 0 to 4 and 16R probability variation jackpot. The number of random numbers is 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that is a 5R normal jackpot is 5 to 15. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop certainty machine, in which the probability of a certainty variation big hit in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that of the first special symbol. That is, in the probability variation gaming state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode), compared to the time-saving gaming state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) and normal gaming state (low-probability mode and non-high-frequency support mode), a big hit If the lottery result in the lottery is a big hit, the expected value of the game ball is set to be high.

  In the present embodiment, a first prize opening 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning, and an individual shaking for each second winning opening 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. Minute table is set, the distribution probability of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball has won the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol It is also possible that the jackpot type distribution probabilities are the same in the game. Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probability variation machine, and it may be considered that the gaming machine 10 is configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-two-mixer, or the like.

  Then, the MPU 41, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", "5R normal jackpot". It is determined whether it is a "big hit" or "out."

  Here, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R certainty variation jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, the open / close execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened in the jackpot game is repeated five times is executed. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R probability variation jackpot, the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

  In the case of 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game, the probability transition mode is changed to the high probability mode in which the jackpot winning probability is high and the high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric auditors 315b is high. In the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", or "5R regular jackpot".

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the low-probability mode in which the winning probability of the jackpot is low and the high-frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high is shifted to the time saving game state. In the present embodiment, the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) informs the player of the lottery result in a predetermined number of jackpot lottery such as 50 times and 100 times set in advance. Until or when it is determined that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot before the stipulated number of times has passed to the player.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine, instead of the loop probability variation machine, after the jackpot game at the probability variation jackpot is over, a predetermined number of preset (for example, 50 or 100 times) jackpots are hit. If the lottery is executed in the probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not a big hit before the specified number of times has passed, the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency Support mode), and the high-frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment to perform a falling lottery from the probability variation game state to the time saving game state or the normal game state in the variable game. In addition, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out, the big hit game state and the time saving game state are not shifted. In the present embodiment, a case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types of 5R certainty variation jackpot, 16R certainty variation jackpot and 5R normal jackpot is described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, two round certainty variation jackpots, two. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round jackpot, 16R jackpot.

  Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display portion 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of alignment. Specifically, due to the disconnection type table stored in the disconnection type table storage area in the ROM 411, the front-rear out-reach that the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the reach also occurs After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of out-of-bounds, ie, the out-of-front / out-of-line reach, in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and the out-of-reach does not occur is set.

  Here, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of the disconnection type table. In the example shown in FIG. 7D, the value of the random number that is the out-of-position reach is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that is the reach other than the out-of-position is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that is completely out of reach is 39. ~ 238. The MPU 41 determines that the reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the variable game that wins the 5R probability jackpot, the 16R probability jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot, that is, the variation game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, the reach indicates a state in which it is likely to be a symbol combination of main symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won in a period from when the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display unit 341 is started until the symbols are stopped and displayed. It is a fluctuation state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two stop positions among the three stop positions on the activated line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is in a changed state. Also, during the reach variation state in the symbol display unit 341, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect Person participation type operation effect processing and the like are executed. During execution of these effect processes, the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden or may be reduced or enlarged and displayed.

  For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated, and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b is to be opened for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 412c. For example, if the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 199, it is considered to be a win, and if the electric accessory release counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is considered to be a win.

  The variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type, in the voice lamp control device 5, rough variation game production such as high-speed variation production (basic production, non-reach production), normal reach production, super reach production, special reach production, etc. The type is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the MPU 41 executes a main process, which will be described later, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines the variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and the preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of the variation pattern by referring to the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, or the deviation variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. It should be noted that these fluctuation tables may be provided individually for the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variation big hit variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation big hit and the 16R probability variation big hit.

  Here, FIG. 8 (A), FIG. 8 (B), and FIG. 8 (C) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, and a deviation variation table. As shown in FIGS. 8 (A), 8 (B) and 8 (C), in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table and the deviation variation table, the variation pattern is set in advance according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, the MPU 41, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R regular jackpot”, the regular jackpot variation table, and when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot”, the probability variation jackpot variation table, lottery If the result is “out”, the out variation table is referenced to identify the type of variation pattern.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, the variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach production pattern having the variation display time of 30 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the normal reach production pattern in the symbol display unit 341. Is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach production pattern having a variation display time of 60 s as a variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 displays the super reach production. The pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the variation pattern “03” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach production pattern having the longest variation display time of 90 s as the variation type (production pattern), and the symbol display unit 341 displays the special reach production pattern. The effect pattern is executed. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, in the deviation variation table, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined for each stop type at the time of deviation (front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear outreach, complete deviation) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. Correspondence between the and fluctuation patterns is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of disconnection is the front / rear outreach or the reach other than the front / rear outreach, one of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is complete disassociation, either the fluctuation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern “04” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) with a variable display time of 7 s as a change type (effect pattern type), and displays a symbol. The non-reach effect pattern is executed in the unit 341 (see FIG. 27). When the variation pattern “05” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) with the variable display time of 10 s as the change type (effect pattern type) and displays the symbol. The non-reach effect pattern is executed in the unit 341.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, the variable display corresponding to the variation pattern “04” is displayed as a variation display at the time of the deviation, and the variation display of the deviation pattern is stopped without a notice effect such as a character or a message being displayed. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the variable display at the time of disengagement corresponding to the variable pattern “05”, the variable display is disengaged with a notice effect such as a character or a message being displayed, and the dislocation pattern of disengagement pattern is stopped. To be executed. In addition, when the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern “05”, a player participation type operation effect in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected may be executed as the notice effect.

  Note that the types of fluctuation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 8A, 8B, and 8C. Further, the probability variation big hit variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation big hit and the 16R probability variation big hit.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “01”, a plurality of types of normal reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and any one of them is selected. The normal reach production is executed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, as the super reach effect executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “02”, a plurality of types of super reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and selected from them. One of the performed super reach effects is executed. Super reach production is a reach production that has a longer fluctuation time than normal reach production, the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit (expected degree) is higher than the normal reach production, and the jackpot is won rather than the special reach production. It is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) is low.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the special reach effects to be executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "03", and selected from them. One of the performed special reach effects is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect whose variation time is longer than that of the normal reach effect, and is an effect that develops from the normal reach effect or the super reach effect, for example. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the jackpot winning probability (expectation level) is higher than the normal reach effect and the special reach effect.

  In the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single-shot operation effect in which the single-shot operation is reflected in the effect, the operation button 20 by the player is displayed. A player participation type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which the hit operation is reflected in the effect and a long press operation effect in which the player's long press operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the effect may be included.

  Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 41 issues a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Input to the voice lamp controller 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 adds a variable pattern command "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot in front of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Any of "A01" to "A03" is output. Further, when the lottery result is “5R certainty variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds a “B” indicating that the variation pattern “01” to “03” is the 5R certainty variation jackpot to the variation pattern command “B01”. ~ Any one of "B03" is output. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variable jackpot”, the MPU 41 changes pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. ~ Any one of "C03" is output. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes pattern commands “D01” to “D05” with “D” indicating that the change is in front of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. Will be output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in are determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display section 341 to perform variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, reproduces voice from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and turns on and blinks the illumination section 27. Or turn it off.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process for determining the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display in the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the jackpot lottery can be stably executed by the MPU 41. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, various variation modes can be selectively executed as the variation mode.

  Here, FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information relating to game history, payout performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, in the game information storage area 412d, as the game information, "the number of out balls", "the number of general winnings payout coins", "the number of first winnings payout coins", "the number of second winnings payout coins" , "Variable winnings payout number", "Game setting value", "Base information", "Continuous role ratio information", "Ratio ratio information", "Cumulative jackpot lottery number", "Unit jackpot lottery number of movements" ", The number of jackpots", and the "number of consecutive outliers" are stored. Of these game information, "game setting value", "base information", "continuous character ratio information", "character ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery frequency" are game information (performance) Information).

  The “out ball number” is an integrated value of the number of game balls shot on the game board 31 in the normal game state (a state of low probability mode and not high frequency support mode). This "out ball number" is stored as a value obtained by counting the out balls detected by the out ball sensor 35 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 13 described later.

  The “general winnings payout number of coins” is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winnings in the general winning hole 313 in a normal game state (a low probability mode and not a high frequency support mode). This "general winning prize payout number" is the winning ball command setting of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. 16 to be described later when the winning sensor 313a detects a winning in the general winning mouth 313 in the normal game state. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the general winning opening 313 in the process, the value is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the current prize. .

  The "first prize-winning coin payout number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning the first prize-winning port 314 in a normal game state (a state of low probability mode but not high-frequency support mode). . This "first winning prize payout number" is the winning ball of step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later when the winning sensor 314a detects the winning of the first winning prize 314 in the normal game state. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the current prize when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the first winning opening 314 in the command setting process. To update.

  The “number of coins paid out in the second prize hole” is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the second prize hole 315 in the time saving game state (the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode). . This "second winning prize payout number" is the winning ball of step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later when the winning sensor 315a detects the winning of the second winning prize 315 in the time saving game state. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the present prize when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the second winning opening 315 in the command setting process. To update.

  The “variable winning a prize payout number” is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for the winning of the variable winning a prize port 316 in the jackpot gaming state (the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode). This "variable winning opening payout number" is the winning ball command setting of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. 16 to be described later when the winning sensor 316a detects a winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot gaming state. In the process, when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the variable winning a prize port 316, the value is added to the value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the present prize. .

  In addition, the "out ball number", "general winning award payout number", "first winning award payout number", "second award winning number payout" and "variable award winning number payout" will be described later. In the specific performance information update process of 21, when the “number of out balls” reaches 60,000 balls (step S1806: Yes), the number is cleared to 0 (step S1810).

  The “game setting value” is for selecting the low-probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 7A) and the high-probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 7 (B)) used in the jackpot lottery (win / win determination). . In other words, the “game setting value” defines the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In this embodiment, as will be described later, four-stage game settings (four types of low-probability mode win / loss tables (see FIG. 7 (A)) and high-probability mode win / loss tables (see FIG. 7 (B)) with different jackpot probabilities) Is being prepared. The “game setting value” is updated in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 20 described later.

  The "base information" is information about "base" which is a payout rate (ball-out rate) in a normal game state (a low probability mode but not a high frequency support mode), and this "base" is a normal game state. Is the ratio of the total number of paid-out coins of the "number of general winning-holes paid-out coins" and the "number of first prize-winning coins paid-out" to the "number of out-balls. When the “base” is expressed by a mathematical expression, “base” = 100 × (“general winning award payout ball number” + “first winning award payout ball number”) / “out ball number”. The "base information" includes information on the current state base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the two-time-before 60,000-ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the two-previous-time 60,000-ball base B2 are updated each time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later (steps S1807 and S1808). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent out ball count reached 60,000 was the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous out ball count reached 60,000. The 60,000-ball base B2 is stored two times before as the "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. Also, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S1803), and the current base BL is stored as “base information” in the game information storage area of the RAM 412.

  In the present embodiment, the "base information" includes "current status base BL", "previous 60,000 ball base B1" and "previous two-time 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball base is the history. However, the 60,000-ball base for the past three or more times may be left as the history. Further, the "base information" may include a cumulative base up to the present since the game machine 10 was installed in the game hall.

  “Continuous prize ratio information” is the total number of coins paid out by winning all prize holes (general winning hole 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) for which prize balls are paid out. In the above, it is the information on the "continuous winning character ratio", which is the ratio of the variable payout prize payout number. When the "continuous character ratio" is expressed by a mathematical expression, "continuous character ratio" = 100 x "variable winning prize payout number" / "total payout number". The “continuous accessory ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the “continuous winning character ratio information” is stored as a cumulative continuous winning character ratio from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. In addition, the “continuous accessory ratio information” is a fixed period (for example, for a fixed number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a fixed number of jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) in a normal gaming state is executed Alternatively, it may be a continuous accessory ratio with respect to the number of out balls reaching a fixed number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the “continuous accessory ratio information” may include both the cumulative continuous accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio for a fixed number of periods.

  The "characteristics ratio information" is the total number of coins paid out by winning all the winning holes (general winning holes 313, first winning holes 314, second winning holes 315 and variable winning holes 316) for which prize balls are paid out. , Is information about a "feature ratio" which is a ratio of the total number of payout coins of the second number of winning coin payouts and the number of variable prize coin payouts. When the "feature ratio" is expressed by a mathematical expression, "feature ratio" = 100 × ("the second number of winning coin payouts" + "the number of variable winning coin payouts") / "the total number of payouts". The “feature ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "role character ratio information" is stored as a cumulative role ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. In addition, the "feature ratio information" is for a fixed period (for example, for a fixed number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a fixed number of jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) in a normal gaming state, It may be a character ratio for a certain number of out balls (for example, a period until reaching 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous accessory ratio information" may include both the cumulative accessory ratio and the accessory ratio for a certain number of periods.

  The "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is in the normal gaming state (a low probability mode and not a high frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the gaming hall to the present. It is the number of times the jackpot lottery was conducted. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is also the cumulative variation display number of times when the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display portion 37 is triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. is there. The "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is incremented by 1 each time the symbol variation display of the main display portion 37 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 19 described later. Further, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

  The “unit jackpot lottery number” is a jackpot lottery triggered by winning a prize in the first winning port 314 for a certain number of minus difference balls in the normal gaming state (a low probability mode but not a high frequency support mode). It is the number of times received (the number of times the variable display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed). In the present embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference is the number of balls obtained by subtracting "the number of general winnings payout coins" and "the number of first winnings coin payouts" from the "number of out balls". In other words, the "number of lots per unit lottery" is the number of times the symbol variation is displayed on the 7-segment display 372 (the number of lottery lottery hits), which is an average of 1000 yen, when 250 balls are lent for 1,000 yen at the game hall. is there. The “unit jackpot lottery number” may be the number of times the jackpot lottery is received for a fixed number of “out balls” in the normal gaming state. The “unit jackpot lottery number” is updated in step S1805 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery number” is stored as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery number from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. In addition, the "unit jackpot lottery number" is a fixed period (for example, a fixed number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a fixed number of jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) in a normal gaming state, It may be for a certain number (for example, a period until the number of out-balls reaches 60,000). Of course, as the “unit jackpot lottery number”, both the cumulative unit jackpot lottery number and the unit jackpot lottery number in a fixed number of periods may be stored as the game information.

  The “number of jackpots” is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the game hall to the present is a jackpot. The “big hit number” is incremented by 1 each time the gaming state is changed to the big hit gaming state in the gaming state shifting process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later. The “number of big hits” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

  The "number of consecutive misses" is the number of times the lottery results in the jackpot lottery were continuously missed in the normal game state (low probability mode but not high frequency support mode), and the lottery result is a jackpot. In some cases, it will be cleared to 0 times. The “number of times of continuous deviation” is the result of the hit / miss judgment based on the low probability mode hit / miss table in step S1603 when the symbol fluctuation display of the main display portion 37 is started in step S1606 in the fluctuation start processing of FIG. 19 described later. If the result is off, 1 is added, and if the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit, it is cleared to 0 times. In the present embodiment, the “number of consecutive disconnections” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of times of continuous disconnection" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d by turning off the main power source of the gaming machine 10.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 5, the performance information display device 4A displays “base information” and “game setting values” stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. is there. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a game set value display section 45, a set value change operation section 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the performance display monitor 43 displays “base information” of the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a visible position in a state where the inner frame 12 is expanded (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. May be provided. It is also conceivable to display the “base information” using the two 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37.

  The 7-segment displays 431 to 434 can display the numbers “0” to “9” and the alphabets “A” to “F”. In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when displaying the letter "B", the dots are lit to indicate "8." in order to distinguish it from the number "8", and the letter "D" is displayed. When displayed, a dot is lit and displayed as "0." to distinguish it from the number "0". Also, when displaying any of the alphabets from "A" to "F", it is possible to turn on the dots to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

  The performance display monitor 43 is an identification segment in which the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 among the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are identification segments in which the “base type” is displayed by an abbreviated symbol, and the right two 7-segments are displayed. The indicators 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, in the two left 7-segment displays 431 and 432 which are identification segments, the abbreviation “BL” of the current base BL is “8.” and “L”. And the base values “31” are displayed as “3” and “1” on the two right 7-segment displays 433 and 434, which are ratio segments. That is, on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, “8.”, “L”, “3”, and “1” are displayed in order from the left.

  The performance display switch 44 collectively switches on / off the power supply of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by a pressing operation, and is placed in an easy-to-operate position when the inner frame 12 is expanded. It is provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the power display switch 44 is turned off, the power supply to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. . The performance display switch 44 may be provided in addition to the main control device 4.

  Here, FIG. 11 is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the base information is in the non-display state because the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off. As shown in FIGS. 11B to 11D, when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the “base information” is the present base BL → 60,000 last time. The base is looped in order from the ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base B2 before last, and the current base BL, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular time intervals. The example shown in FIG. 11B shows that the current base BL is 28%, the example shown in FIG. 11C shows that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 34%, and the example shown in FIG. In the example shown in (1), the 60,000-ball base B2 is 32% before the second. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

  A program required to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a program for calculating the current status base BL, the last 60,000 ball base B1 and the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before, and the current base on the performance display monitor 43. A program for displaying BL, the 60,000-ball base B1 of the previous time and the 60,000-ball base B2 of the last-time two in order at regular intervals is stored in the ROM 47 provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main controller 4. As a result, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, when the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43. Further, a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

  Further, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of the "base information" or in addition to the "base information", it is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as "continuous accessory ratio information" or "accompaniment ratio information". Other performance information may be displayed.

  Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by a display of another form such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, the game setting value display unit 45 selects the low-probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 7A) and the high-probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 7B) that are referred to in the jackpot lottery. The above-mentioned game set value for is displayed, and is configured by a 7-segment display. The game set value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by a display of another form such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display, and the performance display monitor 43 is used. You may make it display a game setting value.

  The set value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off by a pressing operation, and when the power of the 7-segment display is on, the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to enable the change of the game set value. The set value changing operation unit 46 has, for example, a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation and a function as a rotary switch that switches contacts by a rotating operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a display example on the game setting value display unit 45 of the main control device.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (A), when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the game set value display unit 45 is in the off state, the 7-segment display is energized to set the game set value. A number is displayed on the display unit 45. The number displayed at this time is the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current game setting value. In the illustrated example, the game setting value is "1". On the other hand, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the game set value display unit 45 is in the lighting state, the power supply to the 7-segment display is cut off to turn off the game set value display unit 45. It becomes a state.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (B), when the game setting value display unit 45 is in a lighting state and the rotation operation is performed on the setting value changing operation unit 46, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed. To be done. In the illustrated example, when the game setting value display unit 45 is rotated right, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is increased, and when the game setting value display unit 45 is rotated counterclockwise, the game setting value display is displayed. The number displayed in the section 45 becomes smaller. When the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the game setting value display unit 45, the changed number is stored as the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. It Therefore, when the power of the 7-segment display is turned off by pressing the set value changing operation unit 46 with the number corresponding to the target game set value displayed on the game set value display unit 45, the power is turned on. The number displayed immediately before being turned off is determined as the game setting value. As a result, the MPU 41 selects the low-probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 7A) or the high-probability mode win / loss table (FIG. 7 (B), which is selected according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. ) See) can be a jackpot lottery.

  The method of changing the game set value is not limited to the method of turning off the power of the game set value display unit 45 after rotating the set value changing operation unit 46. For example, by rotating the set value changing operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) to determine the game set value, by repeatedly hitting or long-pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). By changing the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 and then turning off the power of the game set value display section 45, by inserting the key into the key hole provided in the main control device 4 and rotating the key. A method of removing the key after changing the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 may be used.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331, a symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 and Perform performance display.

[Voice lamp controller 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a ROM 511 and a RAM 512 built therein.

  The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in variable game effects, jackpot game effects, and lamp blink patterns. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  The voice lamp control device 5 executes a process in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, so that the display control device 6 receives a command based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination part 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display part 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the output of the reproduced sound from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing a variable game effect and a jackpot game effect described later.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main controller 4 and the display controller 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main controller 4 to the voice lamp controller 5. The voice lamp control device 5 also outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. Further, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

  Further, the speaker 26 and the electric decoration section 27 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the voice output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. An operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the sound is output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control a voice output effect, a lamp effect according to the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27, and the like.

  The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main controller 4.

  Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51, based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern (stop symbol combination of the main symbols (see FIG. 32 (A)), variation display time, variation type (FIG. 32). (See (B))) and the effect pattern type (see FIGS. 33A to 33C), and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (see FIG. 31). (See step S23057 in the command determination process), the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display portion 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. When the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 executes a payout performance suggestion image display process for displaying a payout performance suggestion image suggesting the payout performance on the sub image display unit 38.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display portion 341 based on the command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. The voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built therein. The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting an interrupt. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, a plurality of types of images such as a variable symbol such as a main symbol used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, and a deviation effect image are stored. ing. The images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include still images and moving images. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used and the display timing as well as the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variable display and the effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 built therein.

  The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 is for paying out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stopping member that switches whether or not the game balls are paid out, It is provided with a payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the game machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 according to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided in the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount of money within the range of the amount of money to be lent to the player. Specifically, a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, whereby the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 so that a predetermined number of game balls are provided. Be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The firing control device 8 includes a firing control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball firing mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, thereby launching the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the launch rail 321. Let it feed on. Then, the firing control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the firing handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation amount to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 to the game board 31. To fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 with a clock signal that is switched ON / OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is shot toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds.

  In addition, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22. Thereby, the firing control IC 81, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, the larger the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, the more the launch strength of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 32. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted to be strong.

  Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for allowing the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stopping switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the firing handle 22 with the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stopping switch 21b is operated by the player. When it is detected, the game ball launching mechanism 32 stops the launch of the game ball. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and a game is prevented when the player is not touching the firing handle 22. Further, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by rotating the firing handle 22 and operating the ball stop switch 21b with a thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, driving units, etc., + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of + 12V or + 5V to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, and the like.

  The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10, and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 90 while the RAM erasing switch 91 is ON.

  Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as a charging unit that is charged by the electric power supplied from the power supply facility. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

  Further, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like when it determines that the power supply is cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the electric power supplied from the power supply facility, it is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. To judge. When the main controller 4, the voice lamp controller 5, the payout controller 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power controller 9, the control being executed is interrupted and a predetermined NMI interrupt process is executed.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 26. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is started up when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and a power outage. NMI interrupt processing etc. are executed. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, etc. is omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

[Main timer interrupt process of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 13 is a flow chart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 13, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process of determining the detection state of a sensor or the like connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected. When the out-ball sensor 35 detects an out-ball, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out-balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out-balls in the game information storage area 412d. To do. The number of out-balls in the game information storage area 412d is cleared to 0 when the 60,000-ball base B1 was calculated last time by reaching 60,000 (step S1810 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21). reference).

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Succeedingly, in a step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and those counter values have reached the maximum value. In that case, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with winning in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control processing (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the launch control process, the game ball is provided on condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is the process to enable the firing of. In addition, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch a game ball when the launch of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 performs a lottery based on the ordinary hit random number counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 412c to determine whether or not the electric power object 315b of the second winning port 315 is in the electric power open state. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, the MPU 41, when not in the high-frequency support mode, determines that the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and determines that it is a normal symbol winning, and the normal winning random number counter C4 is 30 to 249, and is out. It is determined that Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and determines that it is a normal symbol winning, and the normal hitting random number counter C4 is 200 to 249, and is out. It is determined that When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won in the through-gate process, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to win the second winning opening 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 on which the electric accessory 315b is arranged.

[Starting prize processing]
Here, FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 14, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the first winning opening 314. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the first winning opening 314 has been won (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if it is determined that there is no winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the number N of reservations stored in the number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reservations (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number N of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1106. On the other hand, when the number N of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number N of reservations (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 13, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. And S1313), and stores the counter value in the first free holding area of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA of the holding storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 determines the content of the win / loss information before the win / loss information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes the jackpot win / fail judgment target in the variation start process (S1408 of FIG. 17, FIG. 19) described later. The first hold command setting process for checking and setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 based on the check result is executed. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the second winning opening 315. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the second winning opening 315 has been won (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and if it is determined that the second winning opening 315 has not been won (step S1106: No). ), The start winning process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S1005 of FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the reservation number M stored in the reservation number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number M of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, if the number M of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number M of reservations (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 13, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. And S1313), and stores the counter value in the first free holding area of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB of the holding storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hit / non-win information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is the target of the jackpot judgment in the variation start process (S1408 of FIG. 17, FIG. 19) described later. The contents are confirmed, and the second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 15, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 15, “first hold command” is replaced with “second hold command” and “holding number N” is replaced with “holding number M”. Good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the starting winning process of FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or out), the variation pattern, and the hold number N. . Hereinafter, the first hold command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 15, the MPU 41 reads the number of holdings N from the number of holdings storage area NAA of the first holding storage area REA, and also reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first holding from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the high probability mode is set. If the high probability mode is set (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the high probability mode is not set (step S1202). : No), and the procedural steps proceed to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 is set to ON at the time of transition to the high-probability mode in the game state transition process (step S1306 of FIG. 16) in the main process, which will be described later, to determine whether or not it is in the high-probability mode. It is determined based on the high-probability mode flag that is set to OFF when shifting to another gaming state such as a state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 7B) stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. On the basis of the winning / losing table, a win / no determination is made as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the low-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 7A) stored according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change processing of FIG. Based on the probability mode win / loss table, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot win.

  Note that in steps S1203 and S1204, a win / fail determination is executed based on the high probability mode win / loss table or the low probability mode win / loss table saved according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change processing of FIG. 20 described later. However, in step S1203 or S1204, after reading the game setting value stored in step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 20 described later, the high probability mode win / loss table or the low probability according to the game setting value. The mode determination table may be selected one by one to perform the determination.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1. When it is determined that the counter value read out from is not the value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when winning / losing information is stored in the third holding storage area RE3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 14, the jackpot type counter C2 included in the winning / holding information stored in the third holding storage area RE3 and The counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read. In addition, among the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4, the hold area in which the winning / discarding information is stored in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 14 is the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA. It can be determined by the value of.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 and the number N of holdings to the first holding command. In this way, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp controller 5 that receives the first hold command causes the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 to receive the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4 the first hold command corresponds to the hit / miss information stored.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is off, the variation type counter CS1 and the number N of suspensions in the first suspension command (step S1209).

  The first hold command that is set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed in step S1301 of the main process of FIG. Is erased after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with the command. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and the content is not limited to that described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, some or all of the information of the first hold command may be included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main processing, main control processing for the progress of the variation game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1310 is executed as a periodical processing of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S1311 to S1313 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1310 to the next cycle. It

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 16, in step S1301, the MPU 41 controls the output data such as the command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 13 or the previous main process by the control device such as the sub control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. Execute the external output process to be sent to. For example, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a game set value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery number update command in the RAM 412. If it is set, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 to be described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like. If a winning has occurred, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the winning is set in the RAM 412. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the game information in the RAM 412 in the normal game state (in the low-probability mode but not in the high-frequency support mode) when the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314 has been won. The number of payout coins for general winning a prize or the number of payout coins for a first winning a prize stored in the area 412d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the present winning. Further, the MPU 41, in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), to the second winning opening 315. When the winning is generated, the second winning award coin payout number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout coins due to the present winning. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 determines the variable winning award coin payout number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the prize is generated in the variable winning a prize slot 316, as the number of payout coins due to the present winning. Is updated to the value obtained by adding.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes the variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variation game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, but in the variation game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the variation pattern command necessary for the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. To be done. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 13, and the fluctuations updated in steps S1302 and S1313 of this processing. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result and the variation display time of the jackpot lottery is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game consisting of opening, opening / closing execution mode and ending is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 316b of the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, and thus the result of the jackpot lottery (the jackpot type) that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. ). For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times when the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot and the 5R certainty variation jackpot, and the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is the 16R certain variation jackpot. In the jackpot game control process, the round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting each round game in the open / close execution mode, and the ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting the ending.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the variation start process of FIG. 19 described later. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 41 sets the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a jackpot game state in which the open / close execution mode is executed, a probability variation game state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high probability. It shifts to a time saving game state which is a frequency support mode, a normal game state which is not a high frequency support mode in a low probability mode.

  For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable game informing the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. In addition, when the jackpot game is over, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state in accordance with the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that has triggered the jackpot game. In this embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R certainty variation jackpot or the 16R certainty variation jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game is finished, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R normal jackpot. In some cases, after the jackpot game is over, it is shifted to a time saving game state. Further, when the notification of the lottery result for the specified number of jackpot lottery is finished in the time saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the end of the variable game.

  Further, when the transition of the gaming state is transitioned, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to OFF, while setting the flag for the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag to OFF and sets the high-probability mode flag to ON when there is a transition of the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the probability variation gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the high-probability mode flag is set to OFF, while the jackpot gaming flag is set to ON.

  Further, when shifting the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412, and adds 1 to the “jackpot number” stored in the gaming information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the main display unit 37. By this display control processing, the 7-segment display 372, 373 in the main display unit 37, the symbol variation display is executed only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is a symbol showing the lottery result. It will be displayed as a stop. Further, by the display control process, in the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37, each LED lamp is blinked only during a predetermined normal symbol variation display time, and whether or not a normal symbol is won is turned on and off by a pair of LED lamps. It will be indicated by a lighting pattern that is a combination of. In the case of a normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b associated with the second winning opening 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes game setting value change processing. In this game set value change processing, processing for controlling display or non-display of the game set value or change of the game set value stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed according to an operation on the set value change operation unit 46. It The details of the game set value change processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game setting value changing process is executed in the main process, but it is started up when the power is turned on, or between the start-up process and the start of a game ball. It can be considered that the execution is limited. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the game set value cannot be changed until the next power-on, so that the game set value can be changed within the business hours of the game hall. It can be prevented.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes a specific performance information update process of the game information. In the present embodiment, as the specific performance information, the base information, the number of unit jackpot lottery, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are updated. Details of the specific performance information update processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, the process of displaying the base information updated in step S1309 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main processing this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has come (step S1311: Yes), the processing is shifted to step S1301 and the above-described processing of S1301 and thereafter is executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has not arrived (step S1311: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main processing arrives, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing. During the remaining time, the steps S1311, S1312, and S1313 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the next main processing execution timing has come (step S1311: Yes).

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1313>
In step S1313, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1 and then returns the process to step S1311.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot game, and when it is in the jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is executed. When the big hit game is not finished (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not the jackpot game is executed is set to ON when the jackpot game state is shifted in the game state shift process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 16, and is turned off when the jackpot game state is shifted to another game state. It is determined based on the jackpot game flag that is set to.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation display is not in progress. (Step S1402: No), the process moves to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is set to ON at the time of the variation display start of step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 19 described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), It is determined based on the variation display flag which is set to OFF in step S1405 of the variation game control process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variable display, and when determining that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), moves the process to step S1404. However, if it is determined that the variation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process is ended.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 to stop and display the symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game ( In step S1404), the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 sets the number of reservations N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the holding storage area 412b and the number-of-holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB. It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations are 0, MPU41 complete | finishes the said variable game control process. On the other hand, if either the number N of reservations or the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the data of the hit / miss information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the process of step S1407 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform a variation display based on the hit / miss information, and ends the variation game control process. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. Hereinafter, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number M of reservations corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: Yes). The process moves to step S1502. On the other hand, when the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number N of reservations stored in the number storage area NAA of reservations (step S1502), and the execution area AE is changed from the first reservation area REA1. The hit / miss information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the hit / miss information of the second holding area REA2 to the fourth holding area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the hit / fail information of the second hold area REA2 is moved to the first hold area REA1, the hit / fail information of the third hold area REA3 is moved to the second hold area REA2, and the fourth hold area REA4 is moved. The hit / miss information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Although step S1505 shifts when the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: No), step S1501 shifts when both or one of the number M of reservations and the number N of reservations is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number N of reservations is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number M of reservations stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit / miss information from the first holding area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the hit / miss information of the second holding area REB2 to the fourth holding area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the hit / fail information of the second hold area REB2 is moved to the first hold area REB1, the hit / fail information of the third hold area REB3 is moved to the second hold area REB2, and the fourth hold area REB4 is moved. The hit / miss information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the process of step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a shift command indicating that the hit / miss information of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 has been shifted. Then, the shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display portion 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and moves the process to step S1408 of FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. The fluctuation start process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state is the high probability mode. Whether or not the high probability mode is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag which is set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 16 is set to ON. . When the gaming state is the high-probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1602, and when the gaming state is not the high-probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the gaming state is the low-probability mode. If there is, the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 reserves the storage area on the basis of the high-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 7B) saved according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 20 described later. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit information stored in the execution area AE of 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 withholds based on the low-probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 7A) stored according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change processing of FIG. 20 described later. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit / miss information stored in the execution area AE of the storage area 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  Note that in steps S1602 and S1603, a win / fail judgment is executed based on the high-probability mode win / loss table or the low-probability mode win / loss table stored according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change processing of FIG. 20 described later. However, in steps S1602 and S1603, after reading the game setting value stored in step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 20 to be described later, the high probability mode win / loss table or the low probability corresponding to the game setting value is read. The mode determination table may be selected one by one to perform the determination.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation display time of the 7-segment displays 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation game in the fluctuation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the hit determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 8A). Identify. Further, when the result of the hit determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 8B). . Further, when the result of the hit determination in step S1602 or S1603 is wrong, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 8C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604. Thereby, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the variation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

  As described above, when the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds “A” indicating that it is the 5R normal jackpot to the variation patterns “01” to “03” to “A01” to “O”. Any one of "A03" is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R certainty variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 is one of “B01” to “B03” with “B” indicating that the variation patterns “01” to “03” are 5R certainty variation jackpots. This is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "C01" to "C03" with "C" indicating that the variation pattern is "01" to "03", which indicates 16R probability variation jackpot. This is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of change pattern “01” to “08”. It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is “miss”, the MPU 41 causes the variation pattern command to include information indicating whether the reach is out of front / rear, reach other than out of front / rear, or completely out.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 and ends the variation start process. When the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the symbols on the main display unit 37, it sets the variable display flag to ON. This variation display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variation game process of FIG. 17 to determine whether or not the symbol variation display of the main display portion 37 is being performed. Further, when starting the variable display of the symbols on the main display unit 37, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “cumulative jackpot lottery number” stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Further, when the result of the hit / no hit determination based on the low probability mode hit / miss table in step S1603 is out, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “number of consecutive misses” stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the hit / no hit result is a big hit. If there is, clear the "Number of consecutive outliers" to 0 times.

[Game setting value change processing]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value change processing executed in step S1308 of the main processing of FIG. Hereinafter, the game set value change processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed. If the symbol variation display is being performed (step S1701: Yes), the game setting value change processing is ended. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is determined based on the variation display flag that is turned on in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG.

<Step S1702>
When the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is a jackpot gaming state (step S1702), and when it is a jackpot gaming state (step S1702: Yes), the game setting concerned. When the value changing process is finished and the jackpot gaming state is not set (step S1702: No), the process is shifted to step S1703. For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag that is set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
If neither the symbol variation display state nor the jackpot game state (No in steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power source of the game set value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), that is, It is determined whether or not an operation for turning on the power of the game set value display section 45 has been performed on the set value change operation section 46. That is, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or in the jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the game set value is not displayed and the game set value can be changed. Absent. Here, when the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1704 and turns off the power of the game set value display unit 45. If it has not been switched to (step S1703: NO), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the game set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 described later (step S1703). (S1704), the number indicating the read game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). As a result, the current game set value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 sets the set value display flag indicating that the game set value is being displayed on the game set value display unit 45 to ON (step S1706), and ends the game set value changing process.

<Step S1707>
When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is not switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The set value display flag indicates that the game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. When the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1708, and when the setting value display flag is set to OFF (step S1707: No). That is, when the game set value display unit 45 is in the off state and the power is not turned on, the game set value changing process is ended.

<Step S1708>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value changing operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the rotation operation for changing the game set value has been performed. When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1709, and when the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No), The process moves to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the process of changing the display on the game set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before the rotation when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle. On the contrary, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle, a number smaller than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 by one is displayed before the rotation.

  In addition, when the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before the rotation is “4”, and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the game set value display unit 45 is displayed. When the displayed number is changed to "1" and the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before the rotation is "1", the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle. In this case, the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 is changed to "4". Further, when the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is "4", it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is "1". In some cases, further rotation to the left may be prevented.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites and saves the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 as the game setting value in the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and ends the game setting value changing process. As a result, when the power of the set value changing operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game set value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally set as a valid game set value in the RAM 412. It is saved in the game information storage area 412d. Therefore, by changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value changing operation unit 46, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed. Then, the game set value can be confirmed by turning off the power of the game set value display section 45 while the number corresponding to the desired game set value is displayed on the game set value display section 45.

<Step S1711>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the game set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, the set value. It is determined whether or not the change operation unit 46 is operated to turn off the power of the game set value display unit 45. When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1712, and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off. If not (step S1711: No), the game setting value changing process is ended. When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the game set value is cut off in the game set value display unit 45 by cutting off the power supply to the 7-segment display. Is turned off, and the game setting value is fixed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 has a low probability mode according to the game set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710. A win / loss table (see FIG. 7A) and a high probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 7B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to OFF, and ends the game setting value changing process.

  Here, in step S1712, the low-probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 7 (A)) and the high-probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 7 (B)) according to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. ) Is selected. That is, the low probability mode win / loss table and the high probability mode win / loss table select the win / loss table of the same game set value, so that the operation of changing the game set value is easy. However, the game setting value in the low probability mode and the game setting value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode have different stages (numerical values), for example, the low-probability mode game setting value is "1" and the high-probability mode game setting value is "4". It becomes possible to set it.

[Performance information update processing]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 21, the MPU 41 reads the number of various payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and further determines the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Reading is performed (step S1802). Here, the various payout numbers are the payout numbers required for updating the base information and the like, and are the general payout number, the first payout number, the second payout number, and the variable payout number. The number applies. Then, the MPU 41 calculates the current-state base BL based on the read general winning award coin payout number, the first award winning coin payout number, and the out ball number, and of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current base BL is overwritten and updated (step S1803) (see FIG. 22A). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × (number of coins paid out in general winning a prize + number of coins paid out in a first winning a prize) / number of outs.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
The MPU 41 reads the cumulative jackpot lottery number (cumulative variation display number) stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804), and updates the unit jackpot lottery number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1805). The number of unit jackpot lottery is calculated as the number of symbol fluctuation display (number of jackpot lottery) on the 7-segment display 372 until the number of minus difference balls 250 in the normal game state is reached. Specifically, it is calculated as unit jackpot lottery number = "cumulative jackpot lottery number" / (("number of out balls"-"number of general winnings payout coins-" first number of winnings payout coins ") / 250 balls) To be done. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery number” is calculated as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery number from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present.

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of out balls read out in step S1802 has reached 60,000, and if the number of out balls has reached 60,000 (step S1806: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1807. If the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 (step S1806: No), the specific performance information update process is terminated.

<Steps S1807 to S1810>
When the number of out balls reaches 60000 (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22 (A) and FIG. 22 (B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the 60,000-ball base two times before in the base information (step S1807), and step S1803. The current base BL updated in step S1 is shifted to the 60,000-ball base B1 last time (step S1808), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1809). Then, the MPU 41 clears the various payout ball numbers and out ball numbers in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S1810), and ends the specific performance information update process.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
23 to 26 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1310 of the main process of FIG. The display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current status base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in FIG. When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1908 in FIG. 24, and when the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 in-display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B1 was previously displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 24 described later. When the B1 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1918 of FIG. 25, and when the B1 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B2 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1903). Here, the B2 in-display flag is a flag indicating that the performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000-ball base B2 two times before, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 25 described later. When the B2 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1926 in FIG. 26, and when the B2 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
When the B2 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), The display control process ends.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information saved in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22 (A), "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. “2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that form the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 22B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating that there is are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that configure the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag ON (step S1906), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain time (step S1907), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. 23 (step S1901) (step S1901: YES). (S1908), it is determined whether the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1910), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000-ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22A, "8.", "1" indicating that the 60,000-ball base B1 was 33% last time. , “3” and “3” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that form the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “1”, “2”, and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that configure the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 displaying flag to ON (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the 60,000-ball base B1 last time on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain time (step S1913), and The display control process ends.

<Step S1914>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 is an alphabet indicating the current base BL by cutting off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434. And the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915) and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1914). (S1916), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. 24 (step S1902: YES), as shown in FIG. (S1917), it is determined whether or not the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No). ), And the procedural steps proceed to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 displaying flag to off (step S1919), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000-ball base B2 that is included in the information two times before (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22 (A), "8.", "2" indicating that the base B2 of the 60,000 coins before is 32%. , “3” and “2” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 forming the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 in-display flag to ON (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to the fixed time for displaying the 60,000-ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 two times before (step S1922). Then, the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 shuts off the power supply to the 7-segment display devices 431 to 434, and the previous 60,000-ball base B1. The letters and numbers that indicate are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1924) and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1923). (S1925), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. 25 (step S1923) (step S1922: YES). (S1926), it is determined whether or not the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927). When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1928, and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current state base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22 (A), "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. “2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that form the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 22B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating that there is are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that configure the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain time (step S1931), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Step S1932>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 shuts off the power supply to the 7-segment display units 431 to 434, and thus the 60,000-ball base B2 is displayed before the last. The letters and numbers that indicate are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 displaying flag to off (step S1933) and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1932). (S1934), the display control process ends.

[Processing of voice lamp controller 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 51.

  It is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination portion 27, startup processing at startup of the audio lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at power failure, etc. Description of those processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt process of voice lamp controller 5]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process of 1 msec cycle.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the MPU 51 performs the operation detection process (step S2001), the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002), the counter update process (step S2003), and the command determination process (step S2004) in the sub-timer interrupt process. The variable game effect process (step S2005) and the jackpot game effect process (step S2006) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process (step S2001) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and the process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51 so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. Will be judged.

<Steps S2101 to S2103>
As shown in FIG. 28, in step S2101, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second operation detection flag to the first operation detection flag. In step S2102, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third operation detection flag to the second operation detection flag. After that, in step S2103, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third operation detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

  As described above, in the operation detection process, the processes of steps S2101 to S2103 are executed, so that the operation state of the operation button 20 is the operation state of the last three operations at 1 msec intervals from the first operation detection flag to the third operation detection. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the latest operation state is stored as the third operation detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second operation detection flag, and the two previous operation states are stored as the first operation detection flag. .

[Operation detection pattern determination processing]
Here, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. Set the flag. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 30, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued. If only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has started. When only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has ended. Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 is not operated.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 29, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, when the first operation detection flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2202, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S2201: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S2205.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2203, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2202: No), executes the processing. The process moves to step S2208.

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2204, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2203: No), executes the processing. The process moves to step S2210.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 can determine that the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing when the operation patterns of “on”, “on”, and “on” occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 for three times. , The first operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 30). Then, the first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing.

<Step S2205>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S2201 that the first operation detection flag is off (step S2201: No), whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Is determined (step S2205). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2206, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2205: No), executes the processing. The process moves to step S2210.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2207, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2206: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S2210.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the non-operation state to the operation state when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times (operation). The second operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 30). Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if the second operation pattern flag is used to determine whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2208>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S2202 that the second operation detection flag is off (step S2202: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Yes (step S2208). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2208: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2210, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2208: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S2209.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the operation state to the non-operation state when an operation pattern of “on”, “off”, and “off” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times (operation). Since it can be determined that the operation has been completed), the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 30). Then, the third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation end of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2210>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “off”, “off”, or “off”, occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times. (See FIG. 30). It should be noted that the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Counter update process]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 27, in the counter update processing (step S2003), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, the effect pattern type counter, the variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of the main symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 decrements the variable display counter by 1. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display portion 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variable display time, that the variable is being changed, and that the variable display of the symbol display unit 341 has ended. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the character type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The character type counter updated here is used to determine the character type suggesting the game setting value. For example, the character type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 114. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the character mode type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The character mode type counter updated here is used to determine the character mode type that suggests the number of times per unit jackpot lottery. For example, the character mode type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 119. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the opening basic effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening basic effect type counter updated here is used to determine the basic effect type at the opening of the jackpot game. For example, the opening basic effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the opening rank suggestive image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening rank suggestion effect type counter updated here is used to determine a rank suggestion image type that suggests the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers to be executed together with the basic effect at the opening of the jackpot game. For example, the opening rank image suggestion type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 104. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the ending basic effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The ending basic effect type counter updated here is used to determine the basic effect type at the ending of the jackpot game. For example, the ending basic effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the ending rank suggestion image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The ending rank suggestion effect type counter updated here is used to determine a rank suggestion image type that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number to be executed together with the basic effect at the ending of the jackpot game. For example, the ending rank suggestion image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 74. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the open / close execution mode effect scenario type, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening / closing execution mode effect scenario type updated here is used to determine the effect scenario type in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. For example, the open / close execution mode effect scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 79. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the round game character type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The round game character type counter updated here is used to determine the character type in the round game of the jackpot game. For example, the round game character type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 49. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the round game rank suggestive image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The round game rank suggestion effect type counter updated here is used to determine a rank suggestion image type that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number executed together with the round game effect of the jackpot game. For example, the round game rank suggestion image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 89.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2004), the command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination processing executed in step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S2301>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2302. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2301: No), the command determination process ends. The command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the command is received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Note that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2301 and becomes the processing target, and is stored in, for example, the processing work storage area. Remembered.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. If the command is a fluctuation pattern command (step S2302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2303. If the command is not a fluctuation pattern command (step S2302: No), the process proceeds to step S2307.

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of main symbols and effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51, the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 32A) stored in advance in the ROM 511, the variation type table (see FIG. 32B), and the effect type table ( The variation pattern is determined based on FIG. 33 (A) to FIG. 33 (C)) and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512. Moreover, MPU51 sets the jackpot flag according to a jackpot classification to ON, when the information regarding a jackpot classification is contained in the fluctuation pattern command. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R regular jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot, and sets the 5R sure variation jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot type. Is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the main symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is first stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is the main symbol that is secondly stopped and displayed, and the final stop symbol is finally and stop displayed. It is a design. The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern table (see FIG. 33 (A)) corresponding to normal reach, a super reach effect pattern table (see FIG. 33 (B)) corresponding to super reach, and a special reach effect corresponding to special reach. A pattern table (see FIG. 33C) is included.

  Here, FIG. 32 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 32 (A), in the first stop symbol selection table, the main symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display portion 341 is defined. 32A, the main symbols are "1" to "9", and "333" is a probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot), which is a symbol combination, "777". "Is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, and the other than" 333 "and" 777 "is a 5R regular jackpot, 5R certainty variation jackpot and 16R certainty variation jackpot. It is assumed.

  The lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol has a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is “5R regular big hit”, the symbol combination of “333” or “777” indicating that it is the 5R certainty big jackpot or the 16R certainty big jackpot (the certainty big jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

  Further, the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", there is no distribution of "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "7". That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation big hit", the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is 16R probability variation big hit is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is “5R probability variable jackpot”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combination “333” indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variation big hit", the symbol combination other than the symbol combination "333", which is the main symbol stop display result suggesting the 5R normal big hit, can be stopped and displayed. Then, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", if the main symbols other than "3" except "7" are determined as the first stop symbol, MPU51 is a 5R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game. Execute the 5R probabilistic change promotion effect that is explicitly specified.

  Furthermore, in the lottery result "16 probability variation jackpot", there is a distribution for all the main symbols of "1" to "9", and the first stop with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1" to "9". The design is determined. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combinations of the doublet other than the symbol combination "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the stop display of the main symbol indicates that the symbol combination other than the "777" symbol combination indicating the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot is the stop display. Can be done. Then, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", if "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

  Then, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a big hit, and determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol determined earlier. Thereby, the stop symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the symbol display portion 341 at the game time is determined.

  On the other hand, the lottery result is "out", there is a distribution for all the main symbols of "1" ~ "9", the first stop symbol determination with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1" ~ "9" To be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “out”, the out type selected based on the out type table (FIG. 7 (D)) and the first stop previously determined The second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the disengagement type is front-rear reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Further, if the disconnection type is a reach other than the front / rear disconnection, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. It is decided by the design. Further, when the disengagement type is completely disengaged, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the main symbols may be determined in the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined in the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol in the display control device 6. You may decide.

  Further, FIG. 32B is a diagram showing an example of the fluctuation type table. As shown in FIG. 32B, in the fluctuation type table, the contents of the fluctuation display time and the fluctuation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command are defined. For example, the variation display time “30 s” and the variation type “normal reach effect pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “A01” whose lottery result is “normal jackpot” and the variation pattern is “01”. Further, the variation display time “60 s” and the variation type “super reach production pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “B02” in which the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” and the variation pattern is “02”. The variation display time “90 s” and the variation type “special reach effect pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “C03” in which the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot” and the variation pattern is “03”. Further, the variation pattern command “D04” having the lottery result “out” and the variation pattern “04” is associated with the variation display time “7s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern”. The variation pattern time “10 s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “D05” whose result is “out” and the variation pattern is “05”.

  Further, FIGS. 33A to 33C are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type table. The effect pattern type table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 33 (A) is a normal reach production pattern type table that is referred to when the final individual production type in the variable game production is the normal reach production, and FIG. 33 (B) is the final individual production in the variable game production. It is the super reach production pattern table which is referred to when the production type is the super reach production, and FIG. 33C shows the special reach production which is referred to when the final individual production type in the variable game production is the special reach production. It is a pattern table.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described as an example where there are five types of effect types corresponding to each variation type, but the number of effect types may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 33, the effect type table when the change type is no reach is omitted.

  In the normal reach effect pattern type table shown in FIG. 33 (A), as the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter, depending on the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). "Production pattern X1" to "production pattern X5" are defined. When the change type (effect pattern) is determined to be the normal reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the normal reach effect pattern type table according to the lottery result. To do. Here, the effect pattern X1 to effect pattern X3 included in the normal reach effect pattern type table is an effect in which the normal reach effect in which the main symbol is in the reach state is executed after the end of the high speed variable effect in which the main symbol changes at high speed, This is a production in which the final individual production type is a normal reach production.

  Further, in the super reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 33 (B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. There is. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the super reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, for the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern table, for example, the normal reach effect is executed after the high speed variable effect is completed, and the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal reach effect as the final individual effect type, This is a production that develops into a super-reach production, which has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The super-reach effect pattern table may include a super-reach effect pattern effect that develops into a super-reach effect after the high-speed variable effect ends without passing through the normal reach effect.

  Further, in the special reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 33C, "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. There is. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 determines the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the special reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the high speed variable effect is finished, and further, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are the final individual effect types. It is a production that develops into a special reach production with a higher jackpot expectation and a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. Note that the special reach production pattern table may include a special reach production pattern that develops into a special reach production after completion of high-speed fluctuation production or normal reach production without passing through at least one of normal reach production and super reach production. Good.

  Then, the MPU 51 sends to the RAM 512 a display variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect type table, and the stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined based on the effect type counter, and the variation type (effect pattern type). Set.

<Step S2304>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 31, in step S2304, the MPU 51 executes a payout performance suggestion image display process for displaying a payout performance suggestion image suggesting the payout performance on the sub image display unit 38. In the payout performance suggestive image display processing, the payout performance suggestive image in a mode in which the character selected according to the game setting value is selected according to the unit jackpot lottery number when a specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the sub image display unit 38. To display. The details of the payout performance suggestion processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

<Step S2305>
In step S2305, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process (step S2003) of FIG. 27, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol variable display is being performed, the remaining time of the variable display time, etc. based on the variable display counter. It is possible to judge. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S2306>
In step S2306, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbols in the symbol display unit 341, the variation type (effect pattern type) and the content of the payout performance suggestion image to the display control device 6. Then, the command determination process is ended. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined in step S2303, the variation type (effect pattern type), and the payout performance suggestion image. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of the main symbol corresponding to each display variation pattern command, an effect image, and the like. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and the effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the effect type.

  Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes a variable display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until the preset variable display time elapses, The change of the main symbol is displayed in order. During the variable display of the main symbol, various effects corresponding to the contents of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. . On the other hand, the sub image display unit 38 displays the payout performance suggestion image when a specific condition is satisfied.

<Step S2307>
In step S2307, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The big hit game start command is a command indicating that the big hit game is started, and is set when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big hit game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S2307: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2308, and if the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2307: No), the process To step S2310.

<Step S2308>
When the jackpot game start command is received, the MPU 51 executes jackpot game effect determination processing (step S2308). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining an effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. The details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2309>
In step S2309, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON. The big hit game effect start flag is a flag for starting the big hit game effect (opening effect), and is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in the big hit game effect process of FIG. 51 described later. (Step S2601).

<Step S2310>
In step S2310, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command to start each round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game and to show what round the round game is, and the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. Is set in. Here, if the received command is the round game start command (step S2310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2311, and if the received command is not the round game start command (step S2310: No), the process To step S2313.

<Steps S2311 and S2312>
In step S2311, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON. The round game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the round game effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later (step S2604). Then, the MPU 51 stores the number of rounds of the started round game in the RAM 512 as the number of rounds information based on the number of rounds information indicating the number of rounds of the round game included in the round game start command (step). S2312).

<Step S2313>
In step S2313, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating that the ending in the big hit game is started, and is set in the big hit game control process in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the ending start command (step S2313: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2314, and if the received command is not the ending start command (step S2312: No), the process is performed. The procedure moves to S2315.
<Step S2314>
In step S2314, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later (step S2609).

<Step S2315>
In step S2315, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The big hit game end command is a command indicating that the big hit game is ended, and is set in the big hit game control process in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S2315: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2316, and if the received command is not the jackpot game end command (step S2315: No), the process To step S2317.

<Step S2316>
In step S2316, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON. The big hit game effect end flag is a flag for ending the big hit game effect (ending effect), and when it is determined whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in the big hit game effect in the big hit game effect process of FIG. Is referred to (step S2612).

<Step S2317>
In step S2317, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a game setting value change command. The game set value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the changed game set value and the changed game set value, and is set in step S1710 in the game set value change process of FIG. To be done. Here, if the received command is the game setting value change command (step S2317: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2318, and if the received command is not the game setting value change command (step S2317: No). , And the process proceeds to step S2319.

<Step S2318>
In step S2318, the MPU 51 changes the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed game setting value included in the game setting value change command and stores it. The game set value stored in the RAM 512 is read in step S2404 in the payout performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 34, which will be described later, and is referred to for selecting a character type that suggests the game set value.

<Step S2319>
In step S2319, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a unit jackpot lottery number update command. The unit jackpot lottery number update command is for a certain number of minus difference balls (for example, minus 250 balls) in the normal game state (low probability mode but not high frequency support mode) to the first winning opening 314. 21 is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of times that the variable display of the symbols on the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 has been executed (the number of times the jackpot lottery has been received), and the specific performance information of FIG. 21. It is updated in step S1805 in the update process. Here, when the received command is the unit jackpot lottery number update command (step S2319: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2320, and when the received command is not the unit jackpot lottery number update command (step S2319: No), the process proceeds to step S2321.

<Step S2320>
In step S2320, the MPU 51 updates the unit jackpot lottery count stored in the RAM 512 to the unit jackpot lottery count included in the unit jackpot lottery count update command. The unit jackpot lottery number stored in the RAM 512 is read in step S2407 in the payout performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 34, which will be described later, and the type of character mode that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number is selected. Referenced for.

<Step S2321>
In step S2321, the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination process.

[Image display processing for suggesting ball performance]
In the payout performance suggestion image display process executed in step S2304 of the command determination process of FIG. 31, the game setting value suggesting character selected according to the game setting value when a specific condition is satisfied is determined according to the number of unit jackpot lottery. It is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 as a pay-out performance suggestion image in the character mode selected as described above. In the present embodiment, the specific condition for displaying the payout performance display image in the variable game state is that the jackpot lottery (fluctuation game) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times). The specific condition may be another condition, and the details will be described as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed according to the game set value and the number of unit jackpot lottery, but instead of one or both of these performance information, other performance information (base information, The payout performance suggestion image may be displayed based on the continuous character ratio information, character ratio information, etc.). Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the payout performance suggestive image display processing. Hereinafter, an example of the procedure of the payout performance suggestive image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot lottery counter set to 1000 in step S2403 (step S2401), and determines whether the value of the jackpot lottery counter after the subtraction is 0 or not. It is determined (step S2402). That is, in step S2402, it is determined whether or not the number of jackpot lottery draws has reached 1000. When the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2403, and when the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2402: No), The process moves to step S2411.

<Steps S2403 to S2405>
When the value of the jackpot lottery counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the value of the jackpot lottery counter to 1000. Then, the MPU 51 acquires the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 (step S2404), and selects the character type according to the game setting value (step S2405). That is, in the fluctuating game state in which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is informed, the winning performance suggestion image is displayed under the specific condition that the number of big hit lottery (the number of fluctuation games) reaches 1000 times. Note that the specific condition for displaying the payout performance suggestion image in the variable game is not limited to the number of jackpot lottery numbers (number of variable games) reaching 1000, and may be other conditions. For example, the jackpot lottery number (variable game number) reaches a predetermined number other than 1000 times, the jackpot number reaches a predetermined number, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is continuously out of the predetermined number, and the variable game effect As a specific condition, the execution of a specific effect may be set as a specific condition, and a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to display a payout performance suggestion image, and to win the lottery.

  Here, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a game set value suggesting character type that suggests a game set value. FIG. 36 is an example of a game setting value suggesting character selection table for selecting a game setting value suggesting character.

  As shown in FIG. 35, as the game setting value suggesting character types, male characters (hereinafter “Sam”), female characters A (hereinafter “Marine”), female characters B (hereinafter “Wallin”), female characters C (hereinafter “Warin”) "Urin"), marine life character A (hereinafter "dugong") and marine life character B (hereinafter "shark") are included. "Sam" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 4. “Marine” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 3. “Wallin” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 2. "Urin" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 1. “Dugong” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is an even number (2 or 4). "Shark" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is an odd number (1 or 3). This point is also clear from the game setting value suggesting character selection table shown in FIG.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, in the game setting value suggesting character selection table, when the game setting value is 4, "Sum" is most easily selected, and then "Dugong" is most easily selected. Other characters are hard to select compared to. When the game setting value is 3, "Marine" is most easily selected, then "Shark" is most easily selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters. When the game setting value is 2, "Wallin" is most easily selected, then "Dugong" is most easily selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters. When the game setting value is 1, "Urin" is most easily selected, then "shark" is most easily selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters.

  In this way, "Sum" is a character that is easily selected when the game setting value is 4 and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 4, and "Marine" is selected when the game setting value is 3. It is a character that is easy to be played and suggests that the game setting value is 3, and "Warin" is a character that is easily selected when the game setting value is 2 and suggests that the game setting value is 2. Therefore, “Urin” is a character that is easily selected when the game setting value is 1 and indicates that the game setting value is 1. Also, "Dugong" is easier to be selected when the game setting value is 2 or 4 than when the game setting value is 1 or 3, and suggests that the game setting value is 2 or 4 (even number). It has become a character. Further, "shark" is more easily selected when the game setting value is 1 or 3 than when the game setting value is 2 or 4, and suggests that the game setting value is 1 or 3 (odd number). It has become a character.

<Step S2406>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 34, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected game setting value suggesting character is “dugong” or “shark” (step S2406). That is, it is determined whether or not the selected game setting value suggesting characters are the male character and the female characters A to C. If the game setting value suggesting character is “Dugon” or “Shark” (step S2406: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2409, and if the game setting value suggesting character is not “Dugon” or “shark” (step S2406: No), the process proceeds to step S2407.

<Steps S2407 and S2408>
When the game setting value suggesting character is not “Dugon” or “Shark” (step S2406: No), the MPU 51 acquires the unit jackpot lottery number stored in the RAM 512 (step S2407), and the unit jackpot lottery number (rank) ), The mode type of the game set value suggesting character is selected (step S2408). That is, when the game setting value suggesting character is other than "Dugong" and "shark", the unit jackpot lottery number (rank) is suggested according to the mode of the game setting value suggesting character. Even when the game setting value suggesting characters are "Dugong" and "shark", the unit jackpot lottery number (rank) may be suggested depending on the mode of the game setting value suggesting character.

  Here, FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 are diagrams showing an example of a character mode selection table for selecting the mode of the game set value suggesting character. The character form selection table is defined for each rank of the number of lottery units per unit. In this embodiment, when the number of unit jackpot lottery is 25 or more, it is “rank S”, when the number of unit jackpot lottery is 20 or more and less than 25, it is “rank A”, the number of unit jackpot lottery is 15 or more and 20 times If the number of times per unit jackpot is 10 or more and less than 15 times, it is classified as "Rank C", or if the number of lots per unit jackpot is less than 10, it is classified as "Rank D". A character mode selection table is defined for each rank.

  Further, in each character mode selection table, a character mode is defined for each game setting value suggesting character, and the mode of suggesting the rank differs depending on the game setting value suggesting character type. For example, in the case of "Sam", the rank of the lottery number per unit jackpot is suggested depending on the body shape. Specifically, it is "rank S" because it is a super macho body shape, "rank A" when it is a macho body shape (see FIG. 35), and "rank B" because it is a fine macho body shape. It means that it is "rank B" because it is a gully body shape, and that it is "rank C" when it is a gully body shape (see FIG. 39A).

  In the case of “Marine”, the rank of the lottery number per unit jackpot is suggested depending on the costume. Specifically, if the costume is a kimono, it is "rank S", if the costume is Santa, it is "rank A", and if the costume is happi, it is "rank B". The fact that the costume is a bikini (see FIG. 35) indicates that it is “rank B”, and that the costume is a tank top indicates that it is “rank C”.

  Also, in the case of "Wallin" and "Urin", the rank of the number of lottery per unit jackpot is suggested according to the posture and the pose. In the case of "Wallin", it is suggested that the ranks are higher in the order of wink, finger whistle, triangular sitting (see FIG. 35), upright posture and lying down posture. In the case of “Urin”, it is suggested that the rank is higher in the order of V sign, guts pose, OK sign (see FIG. 35), good sign, and buy-by.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (A), when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank S” (the unit jackpot lottery number is 25 or more), the super macho figure is most easily selected in “Sam” while the other figure is Difficult to choose, "Marine" is the easiest choice for kimono costumes, while other costumes are hard to choose, "Waling" is the easiest choice for wink while other postures and poses are difficult to choose, "Ulin ", The V sign is most easily selected, but other poses are hard to be selected. In other words, "Sam" has a super macho shape, "Marine" has a kimono, "Wallin" winks, and "Urin" has a V sign. , Suggests that the number of lots per unit jackpot is “rank S”.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (B), when the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank A" (the unit jackpot lottery number is 20 or more and less than 25), the macho body shape is most easily selected in "Sam", while Body shape is difficult to select, "Marine" is most likely to choose Santa's costume, while other costumes are difficult to choose, "Wallin" is most likely to choose finger whistle, but difficult to choose other postures and poses , In "Urin", the guts pose is most easily selected, but other poses are hard to be selected. In other words, "Sam" has macho body shape, "Marine" has Santa costume, "Wallin" has finger whistle pose, and "Ulin" has guts pose. Therefore, it is suggested that the number of lottery for the unit jackpot is "rank A".

  As shown in FIG. 37C, when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank B” (the unit jackpot lottery number is 15 or more and less than 20), the fine macho body shape is most easily selected in “Sam” while other It is difficult to select the body shape of "Happi" while "Marine" is the easiest to select the costume of Happi, while it is difficult to select other costumes. It is difficult to select the OK sign with "Urin", but it is difficult to select other poses. In other words, "Sam" has a fine macho shape, "Marine" has a happi costume, "Wallin" has a triangle sitting, and "Ulin" has an OK sign pose. This suggests that the number of lottery lots per unit is “rank B”.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (A), when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank C” (the unit jackpot lottery number is 10 or more and less than 15), the gully figure is most easily selected in “Sam”, Body shape is difficult to select, while bikini outfits are most likely to be selected for "Marine" while other outfits are less likely to be selected, and "upright" is most likely to be selected for "Wallinn" while other postures or poses are less likely to be selected. , "Urin" is the easiest to select the good sign, but it is difficult to select other poses. In other words, in "Sam" it is a gully form, in "Marine" the costume is a bikini, in "Wallin" it is an upright posture, in "Ulin" it is a good sign, It suggests that the number of jackpot lottery is “rank C”.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (B), when the unit jackpot lottery number is “Rank D” (the unit jackpot lottery number is less than 10 times), in “Sam”, the rattling body shape is most easily selected, while another body shape is selected. In "Marine", the costume of the tank top is the easiest to be selected while other costumes are difficult to select, and in "Wallin" the down posture is the easiest to select, while other postures and poses are difficult to select. In “Urin”, bye bye is most easily selected, but other poses are difficult to select. In other words, "Sam" has a slender body, "Marine" has a tank top, "Wallin" has a downturned posture, and "Ulin" has a bye-bye pose. This suggests that the unit jackpot lottery frequency is “rank D”.

<Steps S2409 and S2410>
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, the MPU 51 causes the sub image display unit 38 to display a payout performance suggestion image (step S2409). Specifically, when the game setting value suggesting character selected in step S2405 is other than "Dugong" or "shark" (step S2406: No), the game selected in step S2405 as the payout performance suggesting image. The set value suggesting character is displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in the mode selected in step S2408. On the other hand, when the game setting value suggesting character selected in step S2405 is “Dugong” or “Shark” (step S2406: Yes), “Dugong” or “Dugon” or “in the mode shown in FIG. 35 as the payout performance suggesting image. The shark ”is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. Then, the MPU 51 sets the suggestion image displaying flag indicating that the payout performance suggestive image is displayed on the sub image display unit 38 to ON (step S2410), and ends the payout performance suggestive image display process. .

  Here, FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a payout performance suggestion image in a variable game. In the payout performance suggestion image shown in FIG. 39 (A), a rugged body shape "Sam" is displayed, and it is suggested that the game setting value is 4 and the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank D". Further, in the payout performance suggestion image shown in FIG. 39 (B), "Urin" of the pose of the OK sign is displayed, and it is suggested that the game setting value is 1 and the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank C". Has been done.

  In the present embodiment, a payout performance suggestion image that suggests a payout performance can be displayed in the variable game, so that the player can confirm the payout performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. In addition to being able to concentrate on the game, it is possible to estimate and enjoy the payout performance by the payout performance suggestion image displayed on the sub image display unit 38. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed as an indication of the game setting value and the number of unit jackpot lottery. Here, the game setting value defines the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot probability). Therefore, by evaluating the payout performance based on the jackpot probability, it is possible to suggest the payout performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the payout performance of the gaming machine. In addition, the number of unit jackpots is the first prize until the number of difference balls reaches a predetermined number minus (for example, minus 250) or the number of game balls (number of out balls) reaches a specific number. This is the number of times the transition determination is performed when the game ball enters the mouth 314. In other words, the number of unit jackpot lottery is an index showing the ease of receiving the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (state with low probability mode and not time saving mode), and the game ball required until the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot. Affects the number (the difference in the normal game state). Therefore, since the payout performance is evaluated based on a plurality of performance information including the number of lottery per unit jackpot, it is possible to evaluate the payout performance reflecting the difference in the normal gaming state, and thus the payout performance of the gaming machine is improved. It is possible to suggest the payout performance based on the index reflected more appropriately.

  Instead of one or both of the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number, the payout performance may be suggested based on the base, the continuous winning character ratio, or the winning character ratio.

  Here, the base is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal game state (state in which the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode) as described above, that is, with respect to the “out ball number” in the normal game state. It is the ratio of the total number of payout coins of the "number of general prize payout coins" and the "number of first prize coin payouts". Therefore, by suggesting the payout performance based on the base, it influences the number of game balls (the difference ball in the normal game state) required until the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the normal game state becomes a big hit. . Therefore, the payout performance is evaluated based on a plurality of performance information including the base, so that the payout performance can be suggested based on an index in which the payout performance of the gaming machine 10 is more appropriately reflected. Become.

  In addition, the ratio of continuous winning prizes is the total amount of winning through all the winning openings (general winning openings 313, first winning openings 314, second winning openings 315 and variable winning openings 316) for which prize balls are paid out as described above. This is the ratio of the number of payout coins in the variable payout slot to the number of payout coins. In other words, the ratio of consecutive winnings is the frequency at which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit (the stay ratio in the big hit game state), and the easiness of winning the variable winning port 316 (the winning rate in the big hit game state). Is an index indicating. Therefore, since the payout performance is evaluated based on a plurality of performance information including the ratio of continuous winning effects, the payout performance in the jackpot gaming state is reflected, so that the payout performance can be more appropriately suggested. It will be possible.

  In addition, the ratio of the prize is the total payout by winning all the winning prizes (general winning prize 313, the first winning prize 314, the second winning prize 315 and the variable winning prize 316) for which the prize balls are paid out as described above. This is a ratio of the total number of coins to be paid out, which is the total number of coins to be paid out in the second winning combination and the number of coins to be paid out in variable coins, in the number of balls. In other words, the character ratio is the frequency at which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit (the stay ratio in the big hit game state), the stay ratio in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), and the variable winning a prize port 316 and This is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the second winning opening 315 (ball output rate in the jackpot gaming state). Therefore, since the payout performance is evaluated based on a plurality of performance information including the character ratio, the payout performance in the jackpot game state and the time saving game state is reflected, so that the payout performance is more appropriately suggested. It becomes possible to do.

  Further, in addition to the above-mentioned payout performance (set value of game, number of lots per unit lottery, base, continuous character ratio or character ratio), or in place of one of these ball-charging performances, the character-charging performance is calculated. The expected ball value may be suggested. Here, the expected payout number is, for example, the expected number of payout balls (payout game ball) with respect to the total number of launch game balls (total out ball number) when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched. Number). The expected payout value is 100% when the total number of launch game balls (total outball number) and the expected number of payout balls (the number of payout game balls) are the same, and the expected number of payout balls (the number of payout games) When the number of balls is larger, it is more than 100%, and when the expected number of payouts (the number of payout game balls) is smaller, it is less than 100%. That is, when the expected payout value exceeds 100%, it is advantageous to the player, and the higher the numerical value, the higher the payout performance. On the other hand, if the expected payout value is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous to the player, and the lower the numerical value, the lower the payout performance.

  In addition, the expected number of payouts (the number of payout gaming balls) is the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), probability variation game state (high It can be calculated from the stochastic mode and high-frequency support mode) and the theoretical ratio of the big hit game state, and the theoretical number of balls in each game state. Here, the theoretical ratio of each gaming state is, for example, a game setting value (big hit probability in the low probability mode and high probability mode (see FIGS. 7A and 7B)), and a jackpot distribution ratio ( (See FIG. 7C), the number of lottery per unit lottery, the role ratio, and the like. In addition, the expected number of payouts (the number of payout game balls) in the normal game state is calculated based on, for example, the number of lots per unit lottery and the base. The number of payout balls (the number of payout game balls) expected in a state other than the normal game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state and jackpot game state) is, for example, the theoretical average number of consecutive games for the first hit, the distribution ratio of the jackpot type (Fig. 7 (C)), the theoretical number of balls in each jackpot type, the ratio of continuous characters, the ratio of characters, etc.

  The expected payout value may be evaluated as a satisfaction rate with respect to the border line. Here, the border line is the number of jackpot lottery required for ball rental per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to set the expected payout value to 100%, and this borderline is the jackpot lottery probability. As it is, it is calculated assuming that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In other words, the border line is the number of jackpot lottery draws per unit amount of money (for example, 1000 yen) that gives a difference of ± 0 when the jackpot is won according to the theoretical probability. Further, various methods for calculating the border line have been proposed, but for example, the border line can be calculated as the number of balls lent at 1000 yen / (the average number of coins paid out in the jackpot game / total probability). Here, the number of balls lent per 1,000 yen is generally 250. In addition, the average number of payouts in the big hit game is the number of payouts per one big hit game when the number of round games of the big hit game is distributed according to the theoretical value. Further, the total probability is an average jackpot winning probability when the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode are distributed according to the theoretical values. Then, the sufficiency rate for the border line is calculated as a ratio of the number of lots per unit jackpot and the border line. When the borderline sufficiency rate exceeds 100%, the larger the value, the more advantageous the player is. When it is less than 100%, the smaller the value is, the more disadvantageous the player. For example, in the case where the number of lots per unit jackpot is 18 and the border line is 20 times, the satisfaction rate for the border line is 90%, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  In this way, since the payout performance is evaluated by the expected payout value (including the border line), it is possible to evaluate the payout performance in consideration of the state of the nail and the surface texture of the game board 31, so that the payout performance is improved. It becomes possible to suggest more appropriately.

  Moreover, when suggesting three or more payout performances out of a plurality of payout performances, it is preferable to suggest the payout performance by combining indexes having different properties. For example, a game setting value related to the jackpot probability, a unit jackpot lottery number (or base, continuous character ratio, character ratio) regarding each prize hole 313 to 316, a jackpot probability regarding each jackpot probability and each prize hole 313 to 316. It is preferable to suggest the payout performance by combining the value and. For example, when the game setting value is suggested by the character as in the present embodiment, and the jackpot lottery number is simply suggested by the character mode, the payout performance may be suggested by the character mode even for the expected payout value. preferable. In other words, when suggesting a payout performance of 3 or more, suggesting a payout performance of 3 or more by one character (indication target) rather than suggesting a payout performance of 3 or more individually for a plurality of characters or the like. Is preferred.

<Step S2411>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 34, when the value of the jackpot lottery counter is not 0 (step S2402: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the suggestion image displaying flag which is set to be turned on in step S2410 is set to be on. Yes (step S2411). When the suggestion image displaying flag is set to ON (step S2411: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2412, and when the suggestion image displaying flag is set to OFF (step S2411: NO). The payout performance suggestion image display process is ended.

<Steps S2412 and S2413>
When the suggestion image displaying flag is set to ON (step S2411: YES), the MPU 51 hides the payout performance suggestion image displayed on the sub image display unit 38 (step S2412), and The in-display flag is set to off (step S2413), and the payout performance suggestion image display process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, in the payout performance suggestion image display process executed when the fluctuation pattern command is received, every time the number of fluctuation games reaches 1000, the payout performance suggestion image is sub-displayed from the start of the fluctuation game. The example has been described in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed on the image display unit 38 and is not displayed when the next variation game is started. That is, the sub image display unit 38 is used as an image display unit for displaying the payout performance suggestion image. Therefore, while the variable game effect for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is executed in the symbol display unit 341, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in the sub image display unit 38, so that the player can perform the payout performance. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the suggestion image is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuation games reaches 1000 times, at least from the start to the end of the fluctuation game, the sub-image display unit 38 continuously displays the payout performance suggestion image. Although the case has been described, it is not always necessary to continuously display the variation game from the start to the end. For example, when the super reach effect pattern or the special reach effect pattern is selected as the effect pattern, while the basic effect (non-reach effect) from the start of variation to the development of the normal reach effect (from the start of fluctuation) The payout performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 only during the period from the end of the basic effect) or from the start of the change to the development of the super reach effect (from the start of the change to the end of the normal reach effect). It may be displayed. In this case, while the super reach effect and the special reach effect are being executed, the variable game effect can be executed together with the symbol display section 341 in the sub image display section 38. When the sub game display unit 38 executes the variable game effect during execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, an image of the variable game effect may be displayed as an upper layer of the payout performance suggestion image. The performance suggestion image may not be displayed, and the variable game effect image may be displayed. Further, in the variation game in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, when the production pattern in which the production with high expectations is executed is selected on the sub-image display unit 38, the sub-image display is displayed. The display of the payout performance suggestion image in the unit 38 may be carried over to the variation game after the variation game.

[Big hit game production decision processing]
In the jackpot game effect determination process executed in step S2308 of the command determination process of FIG. 31, the opening effect, ending effect, and opening / closing execution mode effect executed in the jackpot game are determined. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2501, the MPU 51 executes an opening effect determination process that determines an opening effect that is executed between the time when the big hit game is started and the time when the opening / closing execution mode is started. In the opening effect determination process, a rank suggestion image that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number may be determined together with the opening basic effect that indicates that the jackpot game is started.

  The opening basic effect is determined according to the value of the opening (OP) basic effect type counter based on the opening basic effect selection table defined for each game setting value. In the opening basic effect, the game set value suggesting character may be displayed, as in the case of displaying the payout performance suggesting image in the variable game effect. The game setting value suggesting character type and the game setting value suggested by each game setting value suggesting character are the same as the game setting value suggesting character in the variable game effect. However, in the present embodiment, as the game setting value suggesting character type, “Dugong” indicating that the game setting value is even and “Shark” indicating that the game setting value is odd are included. No, the game set value suggesting character type indicates that the game set value is 4, "Sum", that the game set value is 3, "Marine", and that the game set value is 2. There are four types: "Wallin" and "Urin" which suggests that the game setting value is 1.

  Here, FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the opening basic effect selection table referred to in the opening effect determination process.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the opening basic effect selection table, "no suggestion" is most likely to be selected as the opening basic effect regardless of whether the game setting value is 1 to 4. Here, "no suggestion" is an effect that is different from the effect in which four types of game setting value suggesting characters that suggest the game setting value are displayed as the opening basic effect (an effect in which the game setting value suggesting character is not displayed). Means executed. In other words, in the fluctuating game state, the payout performance suggestion production is executed under the specific condition that the number of unit jackpot lottery reaches 1000 times, but in the opening of the jackpot game, the lottery based on the opening basic production selection table is won. The payout performance suggestion production is executed under a specific condition. In the opening basic effect selection table, "no suggestion" is set to be most easily selected, which prevents the player from easily recognizing the game setting value in the jackpot game. Accordingly, when the game setting value is a low setting value that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from moving to another gaming machine 10 in a short time. Then, the higher the game setting value is, which is advantageous to the player (the higher the jackpot winning probability is), the more likely it is that "no suggestion" will be selected. That is, the higher the game setting value is, the more difficult it is for the game setting value suggesting character to be displayed. This makes it difficult to recognize that the game setting value is a high setting value, and allows the player to proceed with the game while maintaining the expectation that the game setting value is a high setting value.

  As the opening basic effect selection table, a performance information display image may be displayed in the opening effect by adopting a table in which there is no suggestion of "no suggestion". A table having the same probability of selecting "" may be adopted.

  When the game setting value is 4, it is easy to select “Sum” next to “No suggestion”, other characters are less likely to be selected than “Sum”, and when the game setting value is 3, “Suggest” "Marine" is easily selected next to "None", other characters are less likely to be selected than "Marine", and when the game setting value is 2, "Walling" is easily selected next to "No suggestion". Other characters are less likely to be selected than “Wallin”, and when the game setting value is 1, “Urin” is easily selected next to “No suggestion”, and other characters are less likely to be selected than “Urin”.

  As described above, regarding the game setting value suggesting character, “Sum” is a character that is easily selected when the game setting value is 4 and indicates that the game setting value is 4. Further, since "Sam" is not distributed (not selected) with the game setting value 1, the game setting value 1 is denied when the "Sam" is displayed in the opening effect, and the game setting value 2 or more is confirmed. . In that sense, “Sam” in the opening effect is a character whose game set value is determined to be 2 or more.

  Also, "Marine" is a character that is easily selected when the game setting value is 3 and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 3, and "Wallin" is easily selected when the game setting value is 2 It is a character that suggests that the set value is 2, and "Urin" is a character that suggests that the game set value is 1 because it is easily selected when the game set value is 1. Then, the higher the game setting value is, the lower the probability that the game setting value suggesting character suggesting that the game setting value is will be selected. Specifically, when the game setting value is 4, the selection rate of "Sam" is 10/100, and when the game setting value is 3, the selection rate of "Marine" is 15/100, and the game is When the setting value is 2, the selection rate of "Wallin" is 20/100, and when the game setting value is 1, the selection rate of "Urin" is 25/100. In this way, when the game set value is the high set value, it is difficult to display the character that suggests the high set value in the opening effect. As a result, in the opening effect, even if a character indicating that the game setting value is the low setting value is displayed when the game setting value is the high setting value, the game setting value may be the low setting value immediately. It is difficult to judge. As a result, it is possible to advance the game while keeping the player's expectation that the game set value is the high set value.

  Note that as the opening basic effect selection table, a table in which the probability that the game setting value suggesting character suggesting that the game setting value is selected is the same for each game setting value may be adopted.

  On the other hand, the rank suggestion image is determined according to the value of the rank suggestion image type counter based on the unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table defined for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery number. Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of rank suggestion image types, and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of an opening unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the rank suggestion image includes images of whales in a plurality of modes (hereinafter, “whale lucky”). Specifically, there are six types of rank suggestion images: "Koto Lucky", "Gold Lucky", "Goo Whale Lucky", "Normal Whale Lucky", "BAD Whale Lucky" and "BLACK Whale Lucky". Including images. "Kotobuki lucky" is an image that clearly shows that the number of lottery per unit jackpot is "rank S" (25 times or more). “GOLD Whale Lucky” is an image that suggests that the number of lotteries per unit jackpot is “rank S”. “GOO Whale Lucky” is an image that suggests that the number of lottery hits per unit jackpot is “Rank A” (20 or more and less than 25). “Normal whale lucky” is an image that suggests that the number of lottery hits per unit jackpot is “rank B” (15 times or more and less than 20 times). “BAD Whale Lucky” is an image that suggests that the number of lottery hits per unit jackpot is “rank C” (10 times or more and less than 15 times). “BLACK Whale Lucky” is an image that suggests that the number of lottery hits per unit jackpot is “Rank D” (less than 10 times).

  As shown in FIG. 43, in the opening unit jackpot lottery number suggesting image selection table, a rank suggesting image is defined for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery number according to the opening rank suggesting image type counter. In the unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, when the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank S", "GOLD Whale Lucky" is most easily selected, and whale lucky of other modes is hard to be selected. When the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank A”, “GOO whale lucky” is most easily selected, and whale luckys of other modes are difficult to be selected. When the number of lots per unit jackpot is “rank B”, “normal whale lucky” is most easily selected, and whale lucky of other modes is difficult to be selected. When the unit jackpot lottery number is “Rank C”, “BAD Whale Lucky” is most easily selected, and whale lucky of other modes is difficult to be selected. When the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank D”, “BKACK whale lucky” is most easily selected, and whale lucky of other modes is difficult to be selected. In addition, "Kotobuki Lucky" is distributed only when the number of lots per unit jackpot is "rank S".

  In this way, "Kotobuki Lucky" is a rank suggestion image that is selected only when the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank S" and clearly indicates "Rank S". “GOLD Whale Lucky” is a rank suggestion image that suggests that “GOLD Whale Lucky” is “Rank S” because it is easy to select when the number of lottery hits per unit is “Rank S”. "GOO Whale Lucky" is a rank suggestion image that suggests that "GOO Whale Lucky" is "Rank A" when the number of lottery hits per unit is "Rank A". “Normal whale lucky” is a rank suggestion image that suggests that “normal whale lucky” is “rank B” when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank B”. "BAD Whale Lucky" is a rank suggestion image that suggests that "BAD Whale Lucky" is "Rank C" because it is easily selected when the number of lottery hits per unit is "Rank C". "BLACK Whale Lucky" is a rank suggestion image that suggests that "BLACK Whale Lucky" is "Rank D" because it is easy to select when the number of lottery hits per unit is "Rank D".

  Here, FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the opening screen in the jackpot game. In the opening screen shown in FIG. 44 (A), "Sam" is displayed as the game setting value suggestive character as the opening basic effect, which suggests that the game setting value is 4, and the rank suggesting image is "Kuji Lucky Lucky". Is displayed, it is determined that the number of lots per unit jackpot is “rank S”. Further, in the opening screen shown in FIG. 44 (B), "Wallin" is displayed as the game setting value suggesting character as the opening basic effect, which suggests that the game setting value is 2, and the rank suggesting image is "BLACK." The display of "Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of lottery per unit jackpot is "rank D".

<Step S2502>
Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in step S2502, the MPU 51 executes an ending effect determination process that determines an ending effect that is executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode and before the jackpot game ends. In the ending effect determination process, a ranking suggestion image that indicates the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery is determined together with the ending basic effect that indicates that the jackpot game is finished. The process for determining the rank suggestive image in the ending effect is executed in the same manner as the above-described opening effect determining process in step S2502.

  Here, FIG. 45 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an ending basic effect selection table used in the ending effect determination process, and FIG. 45 (B) is an example of an ending effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestive image selection table. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (A), in the fluctuating game state, the payout performance suggestion production is executed under the specific condition that the number of unit jackpot lottery times reaches 1000 times, but in the ending production determination process, the jackpot game Similar to the opening, the payout performance suggestion effect is executed under the specific condition that the lottery based on the ending basic effect selection table is won. Then, in the opening basic effect selection table, “no suggestion” is most easily selected as the ending basic effect regardless of which of the game setting values is 1 to 4. Here, "no suggestion" is, similar to the opening basic effect, an effect different from an effect in which four types of game setting value suggesting characters that suggest a game setting value are displayed (an effect in which the game setting value suggesting character is not displayed. ) Is executed. Since "no suggestion" is most easily selected in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing the game setting value in the jackpot game. Accordingly, when the game setting value is a low setting value that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from moving to another gaming machine 10 in a short time. Then, the higher the game setting value is, which is advantageous to the player (the higher the jackpot winning probability is), the more likely it is that "no suggestion" will be selected. That is, the higher the game setting value is, the more difficult it is for the game setting value suggesting character to be displayed. This makes it difficult to recognize that the game setting value is a high setting value, and allows the player to proceed with the game while maintaining the expectation that the game setting value is a high setting value.

  As the ending basic effect selection table, a table that does not have "no suggestion" assigned may be used so that the performance information display image is always displayed in the ending effect. A table having the same probability of selecting "" may be adopted.

  When the game setting value is 4, it is easy to select “Sum” next to “No suggestion”, other characters are less likely to be selected than “Sum”, and when the game setting value is 3, “Suggest” "Marine" is easily selected next to "None", other characters are less likely to be selected than "Marine", and when the game setting value is 2, "Walling" is easily selected next to "No suggestion". Other characters are less likely to be selected than “Wallin”, and when the game setting value is 1, “Urin” is easily selected next to “No suggestion”, and other characters are less likely to be selected than “Urin”. Further, only when the game set value is 4, there is a distribution of "all". When this "all" is selected, all of the game set value suggesting characters are displayed on the ending screen.

  As described above, regarding the game setting value suggesting character, “Sum” is a character that is easily selected when the game setting value is 4 and indicates that the game setting value is 4. Further, since "Sam" is not distributed (not selected) with the game setting value 1, the game setting value 1 is negated when the "Sam" is displayed in the ending effect, and the game setting value 2 or more is confirmed. .. In that sense, “Sam” in the ending effect is a character whose game set value is determined to be 2 or more.

  Also, "Marine" is a character that is easily selected when the game setting value is 3 and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 3, and "Wallin" is easily selected when the game setting value is 2 It is a character that suggests that the set value is 2, and "Urin" is a character that suggests that the game set value is 1 because it is easily selected when the game set value is 1. Then, the higher the game setting value is, the lower the probability that the game setting value suggesting character suggesting that the game setting value is will be selected. Specifically, when the game setting value is 4, the selection rate of "Sam" is 15/110, and when the game setting value is 3, the selection rate of "Marine" is 20/110, When the setting value is 2, the selection rate of "Wallin" is 25/110, and when the game setting value is 1, the selection rate of "Urin" is 30/110. In this way, when the game setting value is a high setting value, it is difficult to display the character indicating the high setting value in the ending effect. As a result, in the ending effect, even if a character indicating that the game setting value is the low setting value is displayed when the game setting value is the high setting value, the game setting value may be the low setting value immediately. It is difficult to judge. As a result, it is possible to advance the game while keeping the player's expectation that the game set value is the high set value.

  As the ending basic effect selection table, a table in which the probability that the game setting value suggesting character suggesting that the game setting value is selected is the same for each game setting value may be adopted.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (B), in the ending effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, a rank suggestion image is defined according to the ending rank suggestion image type counter for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery number. .. In the unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, "GOLD Whale Lucky" is most easily selected when the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank S", and when the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank A", "GOO" "Whale Lucky" is the most easily selected, "Normal Whale Lucky" is the most easily selected when the unit jackpot lottery count is "Rank B", and "BAD Whale Lucky" when the unit jackpot lottery count is "Rank C" Is most easily selected, and if the number of lots per unit jackpot is “rank D”, “BKACK whale lucky” is most easily selected. In addition, "Kotobuki Lucky" is distributed only when the number of lots per unit jackpot is "rank S".

  In this way, in the ending effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, as in the opening effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, the "jutsu lucky whale" has the unit jackpot lottery number "rank S". "GOLD Whale Lucky" indicates that the unit jackpot lottery count is "Rank S", "GOO Whale Lucky" indicates that the unit jackpot lottery count is "Rank A", and "Normal" "Whale lucky" indicates that the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank B", "BAD whale lucky" indicates that the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank C", and "BLACK whale lucky" is the unit jackpot This is a rank suggestion image that suggests that the number of times of lottery is “rank D”.

  Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of an ending screen in the jackpot game. On the ending screen shown in FIG. 46 (A), the game setting value is clearly indicated as 4 by displaying "all" as the game setting value suggesting character as the ending basic effect, and "normal whale lucky" is displayed as the rank suggesting image. It is suggested that the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank B" by displaying "." On the ending screen shown in FIG. 46 (B), "Marine" is displayed as the game setting value suggestive character as the ending basic effect, which suggests that the game setting value is 3, and the ranking suggesting image is "GOO Whale Lucky." It is suggested that the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank A" by displaying "."

<Step S2503>
Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in step S2503, the MPU 51 determines the open / close execution mode effect scenario executed in the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode effect scenario defines a combination of round game effects executed in each round game in the opening / closing execution mode. In the present embodiment, the effect scenario is determined based on the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario table (see FIGS. 47 and 48) described later. The opening / closing execution mode effect scenario includes an effect scenario in which the performance information display image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in a predetermined round game. Then, when the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed is determined as the opening / closing execution mode production scenario, a round game character selection table described later (see FIG. 49 ( A)) and the round game unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table (see FIG. 49 (B)), the payout performance suggestion image displayed in the corresponding round is determined.

  Here, FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 are diagrams showing an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination processing. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A) is a 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot drawing is 5R normal jackpot, and FIG. (B) is a 5R certainty variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R certainty variation jackpot. FIG. 48 is a 16R certainty variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R certainty variation jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (A), the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table is an effect scenario executed in the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R normal jackpot. Stipulate. In this 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table, an effect scenario is determined according to the value of the effect scenario type counter. Here, "○" in the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table indicates a round game in which a payout performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 0 to 4, the effect scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in one round, and when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 5 to 9, the value of the effect scenario is displayed in 2 rounds. The production scenario in which the performance suggestion image is displayed is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 10 to 14, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in three rounds is determined, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 15. ~ 19, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in four rounds is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 20 to 24, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in five rounds is determined. . When the value of the effect scenario type counter is 25 to 79, the effect scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is not displayed is determined. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 5R normal jackpot game, when the production scenario selected by lottery has a round game in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game. To be done. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 5R normal jackpot game, whether or not the payout performance suggestion image is displayed is determined by lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (B), the 5R certainty variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table is an effect scenario executed in the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R certainty variation jackpot. Stipulate. In this 5R probability variation big hit opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table, an effect scenario is determined according to the value of the effect scenario type counter. Here, "○" in the 5R probability variation big hit opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table indicates a round game in which a payout performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 0 to 4 or 25 to 29, the effect scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in one round is determined, and the value of the effect scenario type counter is 5 to 9 or 30. The production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in 2 rounds is determined in ~ 34, and the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in 3 rounds when the value of the production scenario type counter is 10-14 or 35-39. When the value of the production scenario type counter is 15 to 19 or 40 to 44, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in four rounds is determined, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 20 to 24 or 45. In 49, the effect scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in 5 rounds is determined. When the value of the effect scenario type counter is 50 to 79, the effect scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is not displayed is determined. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 5R probability variable jackpot game, when the production scenario selected by lottery has a round game in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game. To be done. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 5R probability variation jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the payout performance suggestion image is displayed by lottery.

  As can be seen by comparing FIG. 47 (A) and FIG. 47 (B), in the case of the 5R certainty variation jackpot, the probability that the payout performance suggestion image is displayed is higher than in the 5R regular jackpot. Thereby, in the case of the 5R probability variation big hit, it is possible to make the player paying attention to the round game performance pay attention to the round game performance because of the relief feeling of the probability variation jackpot. In the case of the 5R certainty variation jackpot, the probability that the payout performance suggestion image is displayed may be lower than that of the 5R certainty variation jackpot, or may be the same as that of the 5R regular jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the 16R probability variation big hit opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table defines the effect scenario executed in the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R accuracy variation jackpot. .. In this 16R probability variation big hit opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table, an effect scenario is determined according to the value of the effect scenario type counter. Here, "○" in the 16R probability variation big hit opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table indicates a round game in which a payout performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 0 to 4, the effect scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in one round, and when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 5 to 9, the value of the effect scenario is counted in 2 rounds. The production scenario in which the performance suggestion image is displayed is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 10 to 14, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in three rounds is determined, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 15. In ~ 19, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in four rounds is determined, and in the case where the value of the production scenario type counter is 20 to 24, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in five rounds is determined, When the value of the production scenario type counter is 25 to 29, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in 6 rounds, and the production scenario type When the value of the counter is 30 to 34, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestive image is displayed in 7 rounds is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 35 to 39, the payout performance suggestive image is displayed in 8 rounds. When the scenario is determined and the value of the production scenario type counter is 40 to 44, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in 9 rounds, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 45 to 49, the payout is performed in 10 rounds. The production scenario in which the performance suggestion image is displayed is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 50 to 54, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in 11 rounds is determined, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 55. In ~ 59, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in 12 rounds, and the production scenario type counter is set. Is 60 to 64, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in 13 rounds is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 65 to 69, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in 14 rounds is determined. When the value of the production scenario type counter is 70 to 74, the production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in 15 rounds is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 75 to 79, the payout performance suggestive image is shown in 16 rounds. The effect scenario in which is displayed is determined.

  In the 16R probability variation big hit opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table, the payout performance suggestion image is always displayed in any of the round games of 1R to 16R. As a result, it is possible to make a player who does not pay attention to the round game production pay attention to the round game production because of the relief feeling of the probability variation jackpot. In the case of the 16R probability jackpot, as in the case of the 5R regular jackpot and the 5R probability jackpot, a production scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is not displayed may be determined.

  Here, FIG. 49 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a round game character selection table used when an effect scenario in which a payout performance suggestion image is displayed is selected in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process. 49 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round game effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table used when an effect scenario in which a payout performance suggestion image is displayed is selected in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 49A, in the round game character selection table, "Sum" is most easily selected when the game setting value is 4, and "Marine" is most easily selected when the game setting value is 3. , When the game set value is 2, "Wallin" is most easily selected, and when the game set value is 1, "Ulin" is most easily selected. In this way, also in the round game effect, similar to the opening effect and the ending effect, "Sam" indicates that the game setting value is 4, and "Marine" indicates that the game setting value is 3. , "Wallin" indicates that the game setting value is 2, and "Urin" is a character indicating that the game setting value is 1.

  As shown in FIG. 49B, in the round game effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, a rank suggestion image is defined for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery number according to the round game rank suggestion image type counter. ing. In the unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, "GOLD Whale Lucky" is most easily selected when the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank S", and when the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank A", "GOO" "Whale Lucky" is the most easily selected, "Normal Whale Lucky" is most easily selected when the unit jackpot lottery count is "Rank B", and "BAD Whale Lucky" when the unit jackpot lottery count is "Rank C" Is most easily selected, and “BKACK Whale Lucky” is most easily selected. In addition, "Kotobuki Lucky" is distributed only when the number of lots per unit jackpot is "rank S".

  In this way, in the round game effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, like the opening effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table and the ending effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, "Kuji Lucky" Indicates that the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank S", "GOLD Whale Lucky" indicates that the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank S", and "GOO Whale Lucky" indicates the unit jackpot lottery number "Rank A" is suggested, "Normal Whale Lucky" indicates that the unit jackpot lottery is "Rank B", and "BAD Whale Lucky" is the unit jackpot lottery is "Rank C". "BLACK Whale Lucky" means that the number of lots per unit jackpot is "Rank D". And has a suggested rank suggested image.

  Here, FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of a round game screen in a jackpot game. On the round game screen shown in FIG. 50 (A), a scenario in which a payout performance suggestion image is displayed in the fifth round game is selected as the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario, and “Marine” is selected as the game setting value suggestion character. By displaying it, it is suggested that the game setting value is 3, and by displaying "GOLD Whale Lucky" as the rank suggesting image, it is suggested that the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank S". Further, on the round game screen shown in FIG. 46 (B), a scenario in which a payout performance suggestive image is displayed in the second round of the round game is selected as the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario, and "Sam as the game set value suggestive character" is selected. It is suggested that the game setting value is 4 by displaying "," and "Kotobuki lucky" is displayed as the rank suggesting image, which clearly indicates that the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank S". There is.

<Step S2504>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 40, in step S2504, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot game effect determined in steps S2501 to S2503 in the RAM 512. Specifically, the MPU 51 stores in the RAM 512 the opening basic effect type determined in step S2501, the ending basic effect type determined in step S2502, and the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario type determined in step S2503. The payout performance suggestive image type to be displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in the opening, the opening / closing execution mode, or the ending is stored according to. As a result, in the jackpot game, the speaker 26 executes the voice output effect, and the electric decoration section 27 executes the lamp effect.

<Step S2505>
In step S2505, the MPU 51 transmits a jackpot game effect command indicating the content of the jackpot game effect determined in steps S2501 to S2503 to the display control device 6. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening basic effect type determined in step S2501, the content of the payout performance suggestion image executed in the opening effect as necessary, the ending basic effect type determined in step S2502, as necessary. Depending on the contents of the payout performance suggestion image and the number of execution rounds executed in the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario type determined in step S2503, and the payout performance suggestion image executed in the opening effect as necessary. The contents are transmitted to the display control device 6. Thereby, in the jackpot game, the image effect including the payout performance suggestion image is executed by the symbol display unit 341.

  In the present embodiment, a payout performance suggesting image that suggests payout performance can be displayed in the jackpot game, so that the player can confirm the payout performance suggesting image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. It is possible to concentrate on the jackpot game, and at the same time, it is possible to estimate and enjoy the payout performance by the payout performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the jackpot game, the payout performance suggestion image can be displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in any of the opening, the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending. Therefore, it is possible to focus on the jackpot game effect from the start to the end of the jackpot game. In this way, by focusing on the jackpot game effect, it is possible to convey the goodness of the jackpot game effect to the player regarding the jackpot game effect that is easily disregarded by the player.

  In the jackpot game, the payout performance suggestion image can be displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 at any of the opening, the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending, but only at the opening, the opening / closing execution mode, or the ending. The ball performance suggestion image may be displayed on the sub-image display unit 38.

  Also, when suggesting the payout performance in the jackpot game, as in the case of the variable game, instead of one or both of the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number, the base, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, The payout performance may be suggested based on the expected payout value and the borderline satisfaction rate. That is, the payout performance suggested in the jackpot game is not limited to the combination of the game setting value and the number of unit jackpot lottery.

[Variable game production processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 27, in the variable game effect process (step S2005) of the sub-timer interrupt process, in the variable game which notifies the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, when the variation pattern command is received, the command determination process of FIG. 31 is performed. The variation game effect according to the effect pattern determined in step S2303 is executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the electric decoration unit 27, etc., and the payout performance suggestion image determined in step S2304 is displayed in the sub image display unit 38. To be executed.

[Big hit game production processing]
In the jackpot game effect process, the opening effect, ending effect, and opening / closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40 are executed. Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game production start flag that is set to on in step S2309 in the command determination processing of FIG. 31 is set to on, and jackpot game production. When the start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2602, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2601: No), the process proceeds to step S2604.

<Steps S2602 and S2603>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to off (step S2602) and executes the opening effect start process (step S2603), and the jackpot game. The production process ends. In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 to execute the opening effect determined in step S2501 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40, and as an opening effect for the display control device 6. The opening effect start command for causing the image display section 341 to start the image effect is transmitted. Thereby, in the symbol display unit 341, an image corresponding to the opening basic effect is displayed, and when it is determined that the payout performance suggestion image is displayed, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in the design display unit 341. To be done.

<Step S2604>
In step S2604, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect start flag which is set to ON in step S2311 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to ON, and when the round game effect start flag is ON. (Step S2604: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2605. If the opening / closing execution mode start flag is off (step S2604: No), the process proceeds to step S2607.

<Steps S2605 and S2606>
When the round game effect start flag is on (step S2604: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to off (step S2605) and executes the round game effect start process (step S2606), and the jackpot. The game effect processing ends. In the round game effect start process, the MPU 51 executes the round game effect in the corresponding round in the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario determined in step S2503 in the jackpot game effect determination process in the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27. At the same time, it sends a round game start command to the display control device 6 to start the image effect as the round game effect in the corresponding round on the symbol display unit 341. This round game start command includes round number information indicating the number of rounds. Thereby, in the symbol display unit 341, an image corresponding to the opening basic effect is displayed, and when it is determined that the payout performance suggestion image is displayed, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in the design display unit 341. To be done.

<Step S2607>
In step S2607, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending start flag set to ON in step S2314 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to ON, and if the ending start flag is ON (step S2607: YES). ), The process proceeds to step S2608, and when the ending start flag is off (step S2607: No), the process proceeds to step S2610.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the ending start flag is on (step S2607: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag to off (step S2608), executes ending production start processing (step S2609), and ends the jackpot game production processing. To do. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the electric decoration section 27 to execute the opening effect determined in step S2502 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. An ending effect start command for starting the image effect of (3) on the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted. Thereby, in the symbol display unit 341, an image corresponding to the ending basic effect is displayed, and when it is determined that the payout performance suggestion image is displayed, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in the pattern display unit 341. To be done.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag, which is set to ON in step S2316 in the command determination process of FIG. 31, is set to ON, and the jackpot game effect end flag is ON ( (Step S2610: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2611, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2610: No), the jackpot game effect process is ended.

<Steps S2611 and S2612>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2611) and executes ending effect end processing (step S2612), and the jackpot game. The production process ends.

  By the way, a player selects a gaming machine based on individual reasons and plays a game on the gaming machine. Then, as one of the criteria when the player selects the gaming machine, the payout performance of the gaming machine can be mentioned. The payout performance is affected by the ease of winning a prize in the first starting winning opening and the general winning opening, that is, the frequency of being able to receive the jackpot lottery and the payout rate. On the other hand, the easiness of winning a prize in the first starting winning opening or the general winning opening is affected by the physical state of the game machine, for example, the state of nails placed on the game board, the surface texture of the game board, and the like. . Here, the nails placed on the game board have individual differences between the game machines at the shipping stage. In addition, the state of the nail changes over time, and there are individual differences in the degree of change over time between the gaming machines. Also, regarding the surface properties of the game boards, there are individual differences in the shipping stage and changes over time between the game machines. Therefore, even among the same type of gaming machines manufactured at the same time and installed in the same hall at the same time, the first start winning port and the general winning port are different from each other in ease of winning. Since the physical state of such a gaming machine can be confirmed from the outside, the player confirms the payout performance by checking the physical state of the gaming machine, and it is presumed that the payout performance is high. It is possible to select and play a game.

  On the other hand, as a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which the gaming hall side can set the jackpot probability from a plurality of stages of jackpot probability (game setting value). In such a gaming machine, even if the winning performance based on the ease of winning the first starting winning opening or the general winning opening is low, if the jackpot probability is set to a high value, it depends on the jackpot game. Due to the large number of balls output, the total ball output performance may be high. On the contrary, even when the winning performance based on the ease of winning the first start winning opening or the general winning opening is high, if the jackpot probability is set to a low value, the jackpot game is played. The total ball output performance may be low due to the small number of balls. Further, on the side of the game hall, nail adjustment may be performed so that the game ball is difficult to win in the first start winning opening and the general winning opening while increasing the game setting value. Therefore, in the gaming machine in which the gaming hall side can set the jackpot probability from the jackpot probability (game setting value) of a plurality of stages, the player has an advantageous payout performance only by confirming the physical state of the gaming machine from the outside. It cannot be determined whether it is a game machine.

  Also, the jackpot probability (game setting value) is difficult to converge with a small number of trials, and the jackpot may be won with a higher probability than the actual jackpot probability, but the jackpot is won with a probability lower than the actual jackpot probability. Sometimes. In addition, the ease of winning the game balls to the first winning opening and the like is difficult to converge in a short-time game, and variations occur. As a result, despite the high payout performance, the player closes the game in a short time and moves to another game machine, and on the contrary, continues the game for a long time despite the poor payout performance. Can happen.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a payout performance suggestion image that suggests a payout performance can be displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in a variation game or a jackpot game. Here, the payout performance suggestion image is selected based on a plurality of indexes including the jackpot probability and the physical state of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, the player confirms the payout performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, and based on a plurality of indexes including the jackpot probability and the physical state of the game machine 10, the game machine 10 The payout performance can be estimated, and the payout performance can be individually judged for each of a plurality of indexes. As a result, the player can enjoy estimating the payout performance of the gaming machine 10, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, for a player who selects the gaming machine 10 on the basis of the payout performance, even if the payout performance is high, the player may end up in a short time and move to another gaming machine, or the payout performance. It is possible to prevent the game from being continued for a long time despite the low value.

  In the present embodiment, the display of the payout performance suggestion image in the variable game is executed in the sub-image display unit 38, but even if the display of the payout performance suggestion image in the variable game is executed in the symbol display unit 341. Good. In this case, it is preferable to display a payout performance suggestion image at a corner of the symbol display unit 341 such as the lower right corner of the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 52) so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the variation game effect. Further, the payout performance suggestion image is not limited to the one in which the performance information is suggested by the character type and the character mode type. For example. As shown in FIG. 52, performance information may be suggested by a combination of a character aspect and a dialogue. In the example shown in FIG. 52, the dialogue suggests the first performance information such as the game setting value, and the character aspect suggests the second performance information different from the first performance information such as the rank of the unit jackpot lottery. . Further, in addition to or instead of displaying the dialogue on the symbol display portion 341, the payout performance may be suggested by the voice effect by the speaker 26.

  In the present embodiment, the payout performance suggesting image simultaneously suggests payout performance based on a plurality of payout information (game setting value and number of lots per unit jackpot). A plurality of images corresponding to (ball output performance) may be included. In this case, the symbol display unit 341 may display a plurality of payout performance suggestion images, the sub image display unit 38 may display a plurality of payout performance suggestion images, or as shown in FIG. The payout performance suggestion image may be displayed on both the symbol display unit 341 and the sub-image display unit 38. In this way, since the payout performance is suggested by the plurality of images corresponding to the performance information (ball payout performance), it becomes easy to individually estimate the payout performance. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to judge whether to continue or stop the game according to the payout performance which is important when selecting the game machine.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, the sub-image display unit 38 displays the first payout performance suggesting image that suggests the first payout performance such as the game setting value, and the unit jackpot is at the lower right corner of the symbol display unit 341. The second payout performance suggestion image that suggests the second payout performance, which is the first performance information such as the rank of the lottery number, is displayed at overlapping timings. The first payout performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub image display unit 38, and the second payout performance suggestion image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, so that the game is displayed on both the design display unit 341 and the sub image display unit 38. Can focus on the person. As a result, a player who is less interested in the game effect is given an opportunity to pay attention to the game effect, and the fun of the game effect can be conveyed to the player. Further, the first payout performance suggestion image and the second payout performance suggestion image are displayed at overlapping timings, so that the player can display the first payout performance suggestion image and the second payout performance suggestion image. Since it can be confirmed at the time, it is possible to easily judge the payout performance based on the two kinds of payout performances.

  Further, in the round game effect, the game setting value was suggested by the person character, and the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number was suggested by the mode of the specific character. However, as shown in FIG. 54, the character introduction image is displayed in the round game effect. The first performance information such as the game setting value is suggested according to the character type to be displayed and introduced, and the second performance information different from the first performance information such as the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number is displayed depending on the frame color of the character introduction image. It may be suggested. Further, the second performance information may be suggested by the frame pattern, background color, etc. of the character introduction image.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the payout performance suggestion image may be displayed in both the variable game and the jackpot game, but the payout performance suggestion image may be displayed in one of the variable game and the jackpot game, Further, in addition to or instead of one or both of the variable game and the jackpot game, a payout performance suggestion image may be displayed in a customer waiting standby state (a state in which no variation display is held and a game ball is not shot). . For example, in the customer waiting standby state, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed on condition that a predetermined operation (long press operation or continuous hit operation) is performed on the operation button 20 and a command is input to the cross key (not shown). It may be possible to display it.

  Also, in the variable game, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed when the specific condition is satisfied as described above, but as the specific condition in this case, for example, the number of launch game balls reaches a certain number. It is conceivable that the operation button 20 is operated at a timing immediately after the start of the variable game, immediately before the end of the variable game, or a specific effect is executed. It is preferable that the specific effect in this case is an effect that the player does not misunderstand that it is an effect that suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and for example, an effect that requests the player to hit left or right can be considered. . Further, the specific effect may be an effect such as an effect requesting an operation on the operation button 20. By executing the payout performance suggesting effect when a specific condition is satisfied, the player can expect the timing at which the payout performance suggesting effect is executed. Thus, the player can anticipate the timing at which the payout performance suggestion effect is executed and look forward to the arrival of the timing to proceed with the game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  Also, in the jackpot game, it is sufficient to display the payout performance suggestion image in at least one of the opening, the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending. In the opening / closing execution mode, in addition to or instead of the round game, an interval between the round games. The payout performance suggestion image may be displayed with.

  Further, the suggestion of the payout performance may be performed by a voice output effect by the speaker 26 or a lamp effect by the electric decoration section 27 in addition to or instead of the image effect. For example, the payout performance may be suggested by the type of music (BGM) output in the jackpot game. Further, the payout performance may be suggested by changing the music (BGM) during the big hit game. When the payout performance is suggested by the change of the music (BGM), the player outputs the music (from the speaker 26 even if the player does not check the symbol display portion 341 or the sub image display portion 38). It is possible to estimate the payout performance based on BGM). Further, since the payout performance suggestion production is a music change production, even for a player who is indifferent to the music (BGM), attention is paid to the music (BGM) output from the speaker 26 to estimate the payout performance. It is possible to entertain the music (BGM).

  When suggesting the payout performance by changing the music (BGM), the payout performance may be suggested by combining the music before the change and the music after the change. For example, it is possible to suggest the payout performance such as a game setting value according to the music type before the change, and suggest other payout information such as the number of lots per unit jackpot according to the music type after the change. When the payout performance is suggested by the combination of the music before the change and the music after the change, the player pays the ball based on the combination of the music before and after the change as well as whether or not the music changes. It is possible to estimate the performance. As a result, even a player who is not interested in the music can pay more attention to the music output from the speaker 26.

  When suggesting the payout performance by changing the music (BGM), the payout performance may be suggested by the timing at which the music is changed (for example, a round in the opening / closing execution mode). Specifically, in the round game corresponding to the game setting value (for example, 4 rounds when the game setting value is 4), the BGM may be changed with a higher probability than other round games. Further, when the game setting value is an odd number (1 or 3), BGM is changed with a high probability in an odd number round as compared with the even number round, and when the game setting value is an even number (2 or 4), it is an odd number. BGM may be changed with a high probability in even rounds as compared with rounds. When the payout performance is suggested by the change of the music (BGM), the payout performance can be estimated by the round number of the round game in which the music change occurs. Therefore, the player can estimate the payout performance not only by whether or not a music change output from the speaker 26 occurs, but also by the number of rounds in which the music change occurs. As a result, even a player who is not interested in the music can pay more attention to the music output from the speaker 26, and a symbol display is displayed in order to confirm what round the round game in which the music has changed is. It is possible to focus on the display unit such as the unit 341. As a result, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to visually recognize the round game effect, and it is possible to convey the fun of the round game effect to the player.

  When suggesting the payout performance by changing the music (BGM), it is also possible to suggest the payout performance by both the combination of the music before the change and the music after the change and the timing when the music is changed. To be

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration and the same steps as the processing procedure of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be omitted. It should be noted that the configurations and processing functions of the above-described first embodiment and other embodiments below may be selected and combined arbitrarily.

[Second Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game, based on the opening / closing execution mode effecting scenario selection table including the opening / closing execution mode effecting scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed, the effecting scenario in the opening / closing execution mode Has been described. That is, the case has been described in which the round-out game in the opening / closing execution mode depends on the effect scenario in which whether or not the payout performance suggestive image is displayed is selected.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a game ball exceeding the upper limit number (“9” in the present embodiment) in the round game is won in the variable winning port 316 (when a so-called over-winning occurs), the round in the opening / closing execution mode is executed. This is different from the first embodiment in that a payout performance suggestion image is displayed in the game. Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process of the jackpot game effect determination process (see step S2503 in FIG. 40), the opening / closing execution mode effect does not include the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario in which the payout performance suggestion image is displayed. It is also different from the above-described first embodiment in that an effect scenario in the opening / closing execution mode is determined based on the scenario selection table.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59 focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 55 and FIG. 56 are flowcharts showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the command determination processing of the present embodiment, whether or not the round game end command and the variable winning a prize command are received in the command determination processing of the first embodiment described above. Judgment processing has been added.

<Steps S2701 and S2702>
As shown in FIG. 55, when the received command is neither a variation pattern command, a jackpot game start command, or a round game end command (No in steps S2302, S2307, and S2310), the MPU 51 issues a round game end command. It is determined whether it has been received (step S2701). The round game end command is set when ending the round game in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 16, for example, and is output in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 5.

  When receiving the round game end command (step S2701: YES), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S2702). The round game effect end flag is referred to in step S2803 of the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57 described later. If the round game end command has not been received (step S2701: No), the process proceeds to step S2312 in FIG.

<Steps S2703 and S2704>
When the MPU 51 has not received the round game end command (step S2701: Yes), the received command is an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, a game setting value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery, as shown in FIG. If it is not any of the number of times update command (No in steps S2313, S2315, S2317 and S2319), it is determined whether or not the variable winning a prize command is received (step S2703). The variable winning a prize command is set in the RAM 412 together with the award ball command when the award ball command is set when a prize is generated in the variable award opening 316 in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16, for example. This is a flag transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG.

  When the MPU 51 receives the variable winning award winning command (step S2703: YES), it sets the variable winning award winning flag to ON (step S2704) and ends the command determination process. The variable winning opening winning flag is referred to in step S3001 of the payout performance suggestive image display processing of FIG. 59 described later.

[Big hit game production processing]
In the jackpot game effect process of this embodiment, the content of the round game effect start process is different from that of the first embodiment. Along with this, in the jackpot game effect process of the present embodiment, a payout performance suggestion image display process is added, and a process (step) necessary for executing the round game effect start process and the payout performance suggestion image display process is added. ing. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process executed by the voice lamp control device 5.

<Steps S2801 and S2802>
As shown in FIG. 57, in the jackpot game effect process of the present embodiment, the round game effect start process is executed with the condition that the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2604: Yes). (Step S2801), the round game execution flag is set to ON (step S2802). The details of the round game effect start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 58. The round game execution flag is a flag indicating that the round game is being executed, and is referred to in step S2803 to determine whether or not to execute the payout performance suggestion image display process.

<Steps S2803 and S2804>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game in-execution flag which is set to be on in step S2802 is set to be on. When the round game in-execution flag is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), the MPU 51 executes payout performance suggestion image display processing (step S2804) and performs the jackpot game effect processing. In the payout performance suggestion image display process, when it is determined that the payout performance suggestion image is to be displayed on the sub image display unit 38, a process for displaying the payout performance suggestion image on the sub image display unit 38 is executed. It That is, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the payout performance suggestive image is displayed during execution of the round game, and the payout performance suggestive image is displayed in the sub image display unit 38 during the round game. The details of the payout performance suggestive image display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

<Steps S2805 to S2807>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect end flag, which is set to ON in step S2702 of the command determination process of FIG. 55, is set to ON. When the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S2805: YES), the MPU 51 sets the round game execution flag indicating that the round game is being executed to OFF (step S2806), and the round The game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S2807), and the jackpot game effect process is ended. On the other hand, when the round game end flag is set to OFF (step S2805: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to 2607.

[Round game production start processing]
In the round game effect start process executed in step S2801 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57, a process of starting the round game effect is executed. Here, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the round game effect start process executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG.

<Step S2901>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the suggestive image displaying flag is set to ON. The suggestion image display flag is a flag for displaying the payout performance suggestion image on the symbol display portion 341 in the round game, and is set to ON in step S3008 of the payout performance suggestive image display process of FIG. 59 described later. . When the suggestion image displaying flag is set to ON (step S2901: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2902, and when the payout performance suggesting image displaying flag is set to OFF (step S2901). : No), and moves the process to step S2904.

<Steps S2802 and S2803>
When the suggestion image displaying flag is set to ON (step S2901: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the payout performance suggestive image stored in the RAM 512 is step S3007 of the payout performance suggestive image display process of FIG. 59 described later. The contents are read (step S2902), and the contents of the payout performance suggestion image are erased from the RAM 512 (step S2903).

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 transmits a round game start command to the display control device 6. The round game start command is a command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the image effect of the round game effect. When the suggestion image displaying flag is set to ON (step S2901: YES), the round game start command includes information on the payout performance suggestion image type. Thereby, in the round game, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed.

[Image display processing for suggesting ball performance]
In the payout performance suggestion image display process executed in step S2804 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57, the presence or absence of display of the payout performance suggestion image in the opening / closing execution mode and the image type are determined. Here, FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a payout performance suggestive image display process executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG.

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 59, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variable winning port winning flag, which is set to ON in step S2704 in the command determination process of FIG. 56, is set to ON. When the variable winning award winning flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3002, and when the variable winning award winning flag is set to OFF (step S3001: No). The payout performance suggestion image display process is ended.

<Steps S3002 and S3003>
When the variable winning a prize flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter (step S3002) and sets the variable winning a prize flag to OFF (step S3002). S3003). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of game balls that have won the variable winning port 316.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the prize winning counter (the number of balls entered into the variable winning port 316) exceeds the upper limit. The "upper limit number" is set to the same number as the number of winning game balls in which the variable winning port 316 is closed before the predetermined time (maximum opening time) elapses. In the present embodiment, the "upper limit number" is, for example, " 9 ". That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an over-winning has occurred in which the game balls exceeding the upper limit number enter the variable winning opening 316. Here, when the value of the winning counter exceeds the upper limit number (step S3004: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3005, and when the value of the winning counter does not exceed the upper limit number (step S3004: No). ), The payout performance suggestion image display processing is ended.

<Step S3005>
When the value of the winning counter exceeds the upper limit number (step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game is the final round in the opening / closing execution mode (step S3005). When the round game is the final round (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the payout performance suggestion image display process. That is, when there is an over-winning prize in the final round in the opening / closing execution mode, the payout performance suggestion image is not displayed. On the other hand, when the round game is not the final round (step S3005: No), the MPU 51 determines a payout performance suggestion image (step S3006) and stores the content of the payout performance suggestion image in the RAM 512 (step S3007). . Then, the MPU 51 sets the payout performance suggestive image displaying flag to ON (step S3008), and ends the payout performance suggestive image display processing. That is, the MPU 51, when an over-winning occurs in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode (excluding the final round), sets the payout performance suggestion image displaying flag to ON, so that the next round game in which the over-winning occurs In the round game of, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed.

  By the way, in order to save the number of launch game balls in the interval between the round games in the jackpot game, there is a so-called stop hitting technique in which the launch of the game balls in the interval is stopped. When performing such a stop hit, the player repeatedly hits the game ball and stops the hitting while counting the number of the game balls to be won in the variable winning port 316 in the round game. Therefore, the player pays close attention to the variable winning a prize port 316 in the round game without substantially checking the symbol display portion 341 or the sub image display portion 38.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the over-winning occurs in the round game (excluding the final round) in the opening / closing execution mode, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in the next round game of the round game in which the over-winning occurs. To be done. Therefore, it is possible for the player who makes a stop hit to launch an extra game ball for generating an over-winning prize, and it is possible to pay attention to the symbol display portion 341 in the round game. In particular, a player who hits a stop has a strong tendency to emphasize the payout performance as a criterion for selecting the gaming machine 10. Therefore, in order to pay attention to the symbol display portion 341 and the sub-image display portion 38, a player who wins a ball with an over-winning prize It is significant to display the performance suggestion image on the sub-image display unit 38 (or both the symbol display unit 341 or both the sub-image display unit 38 and the symbol display unit 341).

  Further, when the payout performance suggestion effect is executed in the round game next to the round game in which the over-winning for the variable winning port 316 is performed, the performance suggesting effect is executed in a short time after the over-winning. Therefore, the player can easily understand the timing at which the performance suggestion effect is executed, and can prevent forgetting to confirm the performance suggestion effect.

  In the present embodiment, the payout performance suggestion image is not displayed when there is an over-winning prize in the final round of the opening / closing execution mode, but when there is an over-winning prize in the final round, the payout-performance suggesting image is displayed at the ending. It may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the payout performance suggestion production is not executed when there is an over-winning in the final round game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same design change as the design change items in the above-described first embodiment can be made within the applicable range.

[Third Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, in the variable game, the character of the payout performance suggestion image is selected based on the game setting value suggesting character selection table (see FIG. 36) selected according to the game setting value (FIG. 34). Steps S2404 and S2405) of FIG. 34), the case where the character mode is determined based on the character mode selection table (see FIGS. 37 and 38) selected according to the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number (FIG. 34). See steps S2407 and S2408).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the variable game, the game setting value and the rank of the number of times per unit jackpot are converted into points, and the payout performance suggestion image is displayed based on the table selected according to the total points obtained by summing these points. This is different from the first embodiment in that the determined payout performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. In the following, the “total points” may be referred to as “total Pt”, including the reference drawings.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

[Image display processing for suggesting ball performance]
Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a payout performance suggestive image display process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

<Step S3101>
As shown in FIG. 60, in the payout performance suggesting image display process, when the value of the jackpot lottery counter is “0” when the variation pattern command is received (step S2402: Yes), that is, the jackpot lottery count is 1000 times. When reaching, the game setting value and the number of unit jackpot lottery stored in the RAM 512 are acquired (steps S2404 and S2406), and the total point (total Pt) is calculated (step S3101). Specifically, the MPU 51 calculates the summed points by summing the added points set according to the game set value and the added points set according to the number of unit jackpot lottery.

  Here, FIG. 61 (A) and FIG. 61 (B) are diagrams showing an example of the point table used in the payout performance suggestive image display processing.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the set point table defines additional points according to the game set value. In the set point table, when the game setting value is 4, there are 4 additional points, when the game setting value is 3, there are 3 additional points, when the game setting value is 2, there are 2 additional points, and the game setting value is 2. When is 1, the additional point is 1 point. That is, the higher the game setting value, the higher the game setting value addition point is set, and the higher the point, the higher the payout performance.

  As shown in FIG. 61B, the lottery number point table defines the addition points according to the number of lots per unit jackpot (rank). In the lottery number point table, 5 points are added when the number of lottery units is 25 or more (rank S), and 4 points when the number of lottery units are 20 or more and less than 25 (rank A) If the number of unit jackpot lottery is 15 or more and less than 20 (rank B), 3 points will be added, and if the number of unit jackpot lottery is 10 or more and less than 15 (rank C), 2 points will be added, unit If the number of jackpots is less than 10 (rank D), the additional point is 1 point. That is, the number of points per unit jackpot lottery (rank) is set higher as the number of unit jackpot lottery is higher (rank is higher), and the higher the point is, the higher the payout performance is.

  As described above, in the set point table shown in FIG. 61 (A), the higher the game setting value is, the higher the added points are set, and in the lottery number point table shown in FIG. 61 (B), the larger the unit jackpot lottery number is (rank The higher the value), the higher the additional points are set. Therefore, the higher the total number of points with the game setting value and the number of unit jackpot lottery as indexes, the higher the payout performance. That is, the total point is an index having a correlation with the payout performance of the gaming machine 10. For example, if the game setting value is 1 and the unit jackpot lottery number is 13, the addition point of the game setting value is 1 point, and the addition point of the unit jackpot lottery number is 2 points, so the total point is 3 points. (1 point + 2 points), indicating that the payout performance is low. Further, when the game setting value is 3 and the unit jackpot lottery number is 27 times, the total points are 8 points (3 points + 5 points), indicating that the payout performance is high.

  In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation start command is received, the total points are calculated when it is determined that the number of jackpot lottery times has reached 1,000, but the timing for calculating the total points is another timing. May be. For example, the summed points may be calculated each time the fluctuation start command is received.

<Step S3102>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 selects a character image (combined point suggestive character image) as a payout performance suggestive image that suggests the combined points calculated in step S3101, and displays the selected character image on the sub-image display unit 38. It is displayed (step S2408). In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the number of jackpot lottery has reached 1000 times, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed. However, in this payout performance suggestion image, the number of jackpot lottery draws has reached 1000 times. It may be displayed only in the variable game, may be displayed across a plurality of variable games, or may be continuously displayed in the jackpot game.

  Here, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the combined point suggestive character selection table referred to in the payout performance suggestive image display processing.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the total point suggestion character selection table, when the total point (total Pt) is "8" or "9", "Sum" is most easily selected, and other characters are difficult to be selected. When the total point (total Pt) is “6” or “7”, “Marine” is most easily selected and other characters are difficult to be selected. When the total point (total Pt) is “4” or “5”, “Wallin” is most easily selected, and other characters are difficult to be selected. When the total point (total Pt) is “2” or “3”, “Urin” is most easily selected, and other characters are difficult to be selected.

  As described above, the character "Sum" is easily selected when the total point (total Pt) is "8" or "9", and the character indicating that the total point (total Pt) is high (high payout performance) "Marine" is easily selected when the total point (total Pt) is "6" or "7", and the total point (total Pt) is relatively high (the payout performance is relatively high). "Wallin" is easily selected when the total point (total Pt) is "4" or "5", and the total point (total Pt) is relatively low ( It is a character that suggests that the payout performance is relatively low), and "Urin" is easily selected when the total point (total Pt) is "2" or "3", and the total point (total Pt). Is low (pouring performance is low And it has a suggestive character and when).

  By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, the payout performance suggestion image is determined using the tables prepared for each of the two performance information, that is, the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the payout performance suggestion image is determined by one table because the payout performance is evaluated as the total points by converting the game setting value and the number of unit jackpot lottery points into points. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the ROM 511 required to store the table is reduced as compared with the first embodiment described above, and the arithmetic processing procedure can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed based on the total points (ball payout performance) in the variable game, but the payout performance suggestive image is displayed based on the total points (ball payout performance) in the jackpot game. May be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the total points of the additional points based on the game setting value and the additional points based on the unit jackpot lottery number are used as the index showing the payout performance, but the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number and It is also possible to set an index correlated with the payout performance based on a combination of two or more performance information other than the combination of, and to suggest the payout performance based on the index.

  Also, instead of adding the added points based on the game setting value and the added points based on the number of times per unit jackpot lottery, these points are subtracted, multiplied or divided to set an index correlated with the payout performance. Alternatively, it is also possible to set an index correlated with the payout performance based on a predetermined mathematical expression and suggest the payout performance based on the obtained index.

  Also, the first performance information such as the game setting value, and one performance information of the second performance information other than the first performance information is converted into points, and the payout is made based on an index obtained by adding the numerical value indicating the other performance information. It is also possible to suggest performance.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same design change as the design change items in the above-described first embodiment can be made within the applicable range.

  Further, when determining the payout performance suggestion image in the second embodiment, the method of selecting the payout performance suggestion image (character image) in the payout performance suggestion image display processing in the present embodiment is adopted. You can also

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the above-mentioned third embodiment, each of the game setting value and the rank of the number of times per unit jackpot is converted into points, and the payout performance is based on a table selected according to the total points (ball payout performance) obtained by summing these points. The case where the suggestive image is determined has been described (see steps S3101 and S3102 in FIG. 60).

  On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the above-described third embodiment in that the payout performance of the gaming machine 10 is calculated as a payout expected value, and the performance information is suggested based on the payout expected value.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

[Image display processing for suggesting ball performance]
Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a payout performance suggestive image display process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the payout performance suggestion image display process, when the value of the jackpot lottery counter is “0” when the variation pattern command is received (step S2402: Yes), that is, the jackpot lottery number is 1000 times. When it reaches, the expected payout value is calculated (step S3201).

  As described above, the expected payout number is the expected number of payouts (payout) with respect to the total number of launching game balls (total outballs) when, for example, a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched. The number of game balls). The expected payout value is 100% when the total number of launch game balls (total outball number) and the expected number of payout balls (the number of payout game balls) are the same, and the expected number of payout balls (the number of payout games) When the number of balls is larger, it is more than 100%, and when the expected number of payouts (the number of payout game balls) is smaller, it is less than 100%. That is, when the expected payout value exceeds 100%, it is advantageous to the player, and the higher the numerical value, the higher the payout performance. On the other hand, if the expected payout value is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous to the player, and the lower the numerical value, the lower the payout performance.

  In addition, the expected number of payouts (the number of payout gaming balls) is the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), probability variation game state (high It can be calculated from the stochastic mode and high-frequency support mode) and the theoretical ratio of the big hit game state, and the theoretical number of balls in each game state. Here, the theoretical ratio of each gaming state is, for example, a game setting value (big hit probability in the low probability mode and high probability mode (see FIGS. 7A and 7B)), and a jackpot distribution ratio ( (See FIG. 7C), the number of lottery per unit lottery, the role ratio, and the like. In addition, the expected number of payouts (the number of payout game balls) in the normal game state is calculated based on, for example, the number of lots per unit lottery and the base. The number of payout balls (the number of payout game balls) expected in a state other than the normal game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state and jackpot game state) is, for example, the theoretical average number of consecutive games for the first hit, the distribution ratio of the jackpot type (Fig. 7 (C)), the theoretical number of balls in each jackpot type, the ratio of continuous characters, the ratio of characters, etc.

  The expected payout value may be evaluated as a satisfaction rate with respect to the border line. Here, the border line is the number of jackpot lottery required for ball rental per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to set the expected payout value to 100%, and this borderline is the jackpot lottery probability. As it is, it is calculated assuming that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In other words, the border line is the number of jackpot lottery draws per unit amount of money (for example, 1000 yen) that gives a difference of ± 0 when the jackpot is won according to the theoretical probability. Further, various methods for calculating the border line have been proposed, but for example, the border line can be calculated as the number of balls lent at 1000 yen / (the average number of coins paid out in the jackpot game / total probability). Here, the number of balls lent per 1,000 yen is generally 250. In addition, the average number of payouts in the big hit game is the number of payouts per one big hit game when the number of round games of the big hit game is distributed according to the theoretical value. Further, the total probability is an average jackpot winning probability when the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode are distributed according to the theoretical values. Then, the sufficiency rate for the border line is calculated as a ratio of the number of lots per unit jackpot and the border line. When the borderline sufficiency rate exceeds 100%, the larger the value, the more advantageous the player is. When it is less than 100%, the smaller the value is, the more disadvantageous the player. For example, in the case where the number of lots per unit jackpot is 18 and the border line is 20 times, the satisfaction rate for the border line is 90%, which is disadvantageous to the player.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 selects a character image (expected payout value suggestive character image) as a payout performance suggestive image that suggests the expected payout value calculated in step S3201, and sub-images the selected character image. It is displayed on the display unit 38 (step S2408).

Here, FIG. 64 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a payout expected value suggestive character selection table referred to in the payout performance suggestive image display processing, and FIG. 64 (B) is an expected value showing a tank with a payout expected value. It is a figure which shows an example of a rank corresponding table.
Is.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (A), in the expected payout value suggestion character selection table, the expected payout value suggestion character type is defined for each expected payout value rank according to the expected value suggestion production selection table. Here, the expected payout value rank is an index indicating the size of the expected payout value, and as shown in FIG. 64 (B), when the expected payout value is 115% or more, the “rank S” is given. When the expected ball value is 105% or more and less than 115%, it is "rank A", when the expected ball value is 95% or more and less than 105%, it is "rank B", and the expected ball value is 85% or more and less than 95%. Is defined as "rank C" and the expected payout value is less than 85% as "rank D". That is, in the expected payout value rank, the expected payout value is high in the order of "rank S", "rank A", "rank B", "rank C", and "rank D" (high payout performance). In that order, it is advantageous to the player.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64 (A), in the expected payout value suggestion character selection table, when the expected payout value rank is "rank S", "GOLD Whale Lucky" is most easily selected, and a lottery of another mode. Lucky is hard to choose. When the expected payout value rank is “rank A”, “GOO whale lucky” is most easily selected, and whale lucky of other modes is difficult to be selected. When the expected payout value rank is "rank B", "normal whale lucky" is most easily selected, and whale lucky of other modes is difficult to be selected. When the expected payout value rank is "rank C", "BAD Whale Lucky" is most easily selected, and whale lucky of other modes is difficult to be selected. When the expected payout value rank is "rank D", "BKACK whale lucky" is most easily selected, and whale lucky of other modes is difficult to be selected. In addition, "Kotobuki Whale Lucky" is distributed only when the expected payout value rank is "Rank S".

  As described above, "Kotobuki Whale Lucky" is selected only when the expected payout value rank is "rank S", and is an expected payout value suggestive image that clearly indicates "rank S". "GOLD Whale Lucky" is an image of the expected payout value suggesting that it is easily selected when the expected payout value rank is "Rank S" and is "rank S". “GOO Whale Lucky” is an image that suggests a expected payout value and is easily selected when the expected payout value rank is “rank A”, and indicates that the expected payout value is “rank A”. The "normal whale lucky" is an image that suggests a expected payout value that is easily selected when the expected payout value rank is "rank B" and suggests that the expected payout value is "rank B". "BAD Whale Lucky" is an easily-expected expected value suggestion image that suggests that "BAD Whale Lucky" is "rank C" when the expected payout value rank is "rank C". “BLACK Whale Lucky” is an easily-expected payout value suggestion image that suggests that “BLACK Whale Lucky” is “rank D” when the expected payout value rank is “rank D”.

  By the way, in the above-described third embodiment, a payout performance suggestion image is displayed based on two pieces of performance information, that is, a game setting value and a unit jackpot lottery number. Therefore, the above-described third embodiment has an advantage that the arithmetic processing is simple. On the other hand, the game setting value is an index that reflects the jackpot probability and has no correlation with the jackpot type distribution. The unit jackpot lottery number is related to the size of the jackpot lottery number in the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), and has a correlation with the payout in the game state other than the normal game state. Absent. Therefore, in the above-described third embodiment, the number of coins (number of difference balls) in the big hit game state, the average number of consecutive games for the first hit, the number of coins (number of difference balls) in the time saving game state or the probability variation game state. Although the above is not considered and there is an advantage as a simple method, the payout performance of the gaming machine 10 is not properly reflected.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the payout performance is evaluated based on the total expected payout value including the gaming states other than the normal gaming state, and the payout performance is suggested. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest the payout performance to the player based on the performance information in which the payout performance of the gaming machine 10 is appropriately reflected.

  In the present embodiment, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed based on the expected payout value (ball payout performance) in the variable game, but the comeout performance suggestion image is displayed based on the expected payout value in the jackpot game. It may be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same design change as the design change items in the above-described first embodiment can be made within the applicable range.

  Further, when determining the payout performance suggestion image in the second embodiment, the method of selecting the payout performance suggestion image (character image) in the payout performance suggestion image display processing in the present embodiment is adopted. You can also

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the sub-image display unit 38 suggests a payout performance has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game setting value is displayed on the special main display portion, and the game setting value can be visually confirmed by the downward movement of the retention box arranged on the front side of the special main display portion. The embodiment of FIG.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 78, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 65 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 66 is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the game machine 10 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the clune device 36 (an example of a sorting device) and the retention box 39 (visual recognition limiting means) are provided on the right side of the symbol display portion 341 in the game board 31. , A discharge port 319, and a special main display portion 37a (performance information display means) are provided.

  67 is a perspective view showing an example of the clune device 36, FIG. 68 (A) is a sectional view taken along the line X1-X1 of FIG. 67, and FIG. 68 (B) is taken along the line X2-X2 of FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the clune device 36 is for allocating the game balls hit in the right side area of the game board 31 to either a normal entrance 367 or a special out entrance 363 described later. . The clune device 36 has a dish shape having a bottom wall 361 and an annular peripheral wall 362 surrounding the bottom wall 361. The bottom wall 361 has a circular shape in a plan view, and has a high-order bottom portion 361a, a low-order bottom portion 361b, and an inclined portion 361c that descends to the left and is provided between the high-order bottom portion 361a and the low-order bottom portion 361b.

  The high-order bottom portion 361a constitutes the right side portion of the bottom wall 361 and is inclined downward to the right. The high-level bottom portion 361a is provided with a special out ball passage 364 having a special out ball mouth 363 (special discharge port). The special out ball passage 364 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 361c, and extends in the up-down direction D2 at the center of the high-order bottom portion 361a in the front-rear direction D1. This special out ball passage 364 is for guiding the game ball 99 entered through the special out hole 363 to the retention box 39 as described later, and has a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. Is formed in. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out opening 363 does not enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 entering the special out opening 363 can no longer be expected to enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 or through the through gate 317, for example, when passing through the special out opening 363, or special. When it is introduced into the out ball passage 364, it is treated as an out ball.

  The special out ball mouth 363 is an upper opening of the special out ball passage 364, and is open at the high bottom portion 361a. Further, the special out opening 363 is surrounded by an inhibition wall 365 (inhibition means) protruding upward from the high bottom portion 361a. The inhibition wall 365 is to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the special out ball opening 363 to make it difficult to enter the game ball, and includes a large inhibition wall 365a and a small inhibition wall 365b.

  The large inhibition wall 365a is provided in the right half portion around the special out nozzle 363. That is, the large obstruction wall 365a is provided in a portion close to the peripheral wall 362 and far from the inclined portion 361c, and obstructs the entry of the game ball 99 from the right half of the special out opening 363. Further, the height dimension of the large inhibition wall 365a is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball 99. Therefore, it is not possible to expect the game ball 99 to enter the special out opening 363 from the large inhibition wall 365a side.

  On the other hand, the small inhibition wall 365b is provided in the left half of the peripheral portion of the special out nozzle 363. That is, the small obstruction wall 365b is provided in a far portion near the inclined wall 362, which is far from the peripheral wall 362, and obstructs entry of the game ball 99 from the left half side of the special out opening 363. The height dimension of the small inhibition wall 365b is set smaller than the radius of the game ball 99. Therefore, compared with the game ball 99 from the large inhibition wall 365a side (the right half portion side of the special out nozzle 363) for the special out nozzle 363, the small inhibition wall 365b side (of the special out nozzle 363) It can be expected that the game ball 99 enters from the left half part side).

  The lower bottom portion 361b constitutes a left side portion of the bottom wall 361 and is inclined toward the center so as to be lower. The lower bottom portion 361b is provided with a normal passage 368 having a normal entrance 367. The normal passage 368 is provided at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 361c so as to extend in the up-down direction D2 except for the portion along the peripheral wall 362 in the lower bottom portion 361b. This normal passage 368 is for guiding the game ball 99 entered through the normal entrance 367 to the lower right of the game board 31, and has a semi-cylindrical shape having an opening area larger than that of the special out opening 363. Is formed in. In addition, a guide member 369 for discharging the game ball 99 passing through the normal passage 368 from a fixed position is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 368. The guide member 369 has a smaller cross-sectional area on the lower side than the upper side, and the lower portion of the guide member 369 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball 99.

  In such a clune device 36, the game ball 99 that has been hit in the right side area of the game board 31 moves on the bottom wall 361 along the peripheral wall 362. As a result, the flow down of the game ball 99 is delayed in the clune device 36. Then, most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 361, for example, when the kinetic energy becomes small, and also collide with the peripheral wall 362 and the inhibiting wall 365 of the clune device 36, other game balls 99, and the like. It usually enters the ball entrance 367. The game ball 99 that has entered the normal ball inlet 367 moves through the normal passage 368 and the guide member 369 and is discharged from a fixed position. Then, the game ball 99 released from a certain position can enter the second winning opening 315 and the variable winning opening 316, and can also pass through the through gate 317.

  On the other hand, a part of the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 361 (for example, 0.01% to 1%) is usually changed in the moving direction at the periphery of the ball entrance 367, and collides with another game ball 99. As a result, it moves toward the small blocking wall 365b of the special out opening 363, gets over the small blocking wall 365b, and enters the special out opening 363. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 363 moves through the special out ball passage 364 and is discharged toward the retention box 39.

  In the present embodiment, the special out opening 363 is provided in the high bottom portion 361a of the bottom wall 361, the normal entrance opening 367 has a larger opening area than the special out opening 363, and the special out opening 363 obstructs the opening. Since it is surrounded by the wall 365, the special out ball mouth 363 is significantly harder for the game ball 99 to enter than the normal ball entrance 367, but instead of all or a part of them, In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out opening 363 by other means. For example, to generate a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 in the peripheral portion of the special out opening 363, to form an air curtain by ejecting air in the peripheral portion of the special out opening 363, a special output It is conceivable to dispose an obstacle (a shape different from that of the inhibition wall 365) that inhibits the ball entering the ball head 363.

  Here, FIG. 69 (A) is a front view showing the retention box 39 and its surroundings when the retention box 39 is at the upper limit position, FIG. 69 (B) is a vertical sectional view of FIG. 69 (A), and FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X3-X3 of FIG. 70 (A) is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (B) showing the retention box 39 and its surroundings when the retention box 39 is at the lower limit position, and FIG. 70 (B) shows the retention box 39 at the lower limit position. FIG. 70C is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69C showing the stay box 39 and its surroundings in a certain case, and FIG. 70C shows the stay box 39 when the stay box 39 is at an intermediate position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. And FIG. 70 (D) showing the periphery thereof, and FIG. 70 (D) is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (C) showing the retention box 39 and its periphery when the retention box 39 is in the intermediate position. Is.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the retention box 39 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out opening 363 of the clune device 36 and keeps the game ball 99 inside until the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is intended to stay. In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is that a certain period of time elapses after the retention box 39 is moved to the lower limit position (see FIGS. 70A and 70B) described below. The retention box 39 has an upper opening 391 that allows the game ball 99 to be received. This retention box 39 has a front wall 392a, a rear wall 392b, a left side wall 392c, a right side wall 392d and a bottom wall 392e, and a retention space 393 for retaining a certain number of game balls 99 is defined by these walls 392a to 392e. Has been done. The stay box 39 is entirely opaque (for example, black or white), which makes the back side of the stay box 39 invisible or difficult to see.

  The retention box 39 has an upper limit position (see FIG. 69) that covers the entire front surface of the special main display portion 37a and a lower limit position (FIGS. 70A and 70) that is entirely below the special main display portion 37a. (See (B)) and can be moved in the vertical direction D2. As shown in FIG. 71, the retention box 39 is driven by a motor 39a connected to the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the retention box 39 is moved downward by, for example, the MPU 51 rotating the motor 39a in the forward direction, and moved upward by rotating the motor 39a in the reverse direction by the MPU 51. The motor 39a is, for example, a stepping motor, and the stay box 39 is enabled at a predetermined position by controlling the number of drive pulses input to the motor 39a.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 (C) and 70 (D), the retention box 39 can be stopped at a plurality of intermediate positions set between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. When the retention box 39 is located at a plurality of intermediate positions, part of the special main display portion 37a is visible, and the opening 394 of the retention box 39 does not communicate with the discharge port 319 of the game board 31. That is, when the retention box 39 is at the intermediate position, the game balls 99 of the retention box 39 are retained in the retention box 39 without being discharged to the outside. In this embodiment, the retention box 39 can be stopped at three intermediate positions (see FIGS. 73 and 74) corresponding to the lower movement levels 1 to 3, as described later. It is possible to determine whether the segment A of the special main display portion 37a is turned on or off at the intermediate position of the downward movement level 1, and whether the segments B and F of the special main display portion 37a are turned on or off at the intermediate position of the downward movement level 2. It is possible to judge whether the segment G of the special main display portion 37a is turned on or off at the intermediate position of the lower level 3. The intermediate position is, for example, in addition to the position corresponding to the lower movement levels 1 to 3 or in place of at least one of the positions corresponding to the lower movement levels 1 to 3, for example, in the segments C and E of the special main display portion 37a. It may be set to a position where it can be determined whether to turn on or off, a position where it can be determined to turn on or off the segment D of the special main display portion 37a, and the like. Then, the range in which the special main display portion 37a can be visually recognized is different at each intermediate position, and the range in which the special main display portion 37a can be visually confirmed becomes larger as the retention box 39 approaches the lower limit position. Further, the position of the stay box 39 is determined according to the number of game balls stayed inside (the number of stay game balls), and the lower the number of stay game balls, the lower the position (see FIG. 74 (C)). This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74.

  The retention box 39 does not necessarily have to be opaque as a whole, and at least one of the front wall 392a and the rear wall 392b may be opaque. Further, the stay box 39 is allowed to be transparent in a range where the special main display portion 37a is invisible or difficult when it is at the upper limit position.

  An opening 394 is formed in the lower portion of the rear wall 392b of the retention box 39. As shown in FIGS. 70 (C) and 70 (D), the opening 394 communicates with the discharge port 319 that penetrates the game board 31 when the retention box 39 is at the lower limit position. As a result, when the stay box 39 is moved down to the lower limit position, the game ball 99 of the stay box 39 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the opening 394 and the discharge port 319. Further, the bottom wall 392e of the retention box 39 is inclined so that the upper surface thereof becomes lower toward the rear side. Thereby, when the opening 394 and the discharge port 319 are communicated with each other, it is promoted that the game ball 99 of the retention box 39 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the opening 394 and the discharge port 319. It

  Further, a special out ball sensor 35a is provided on the left side wall 392c of the retention box 39 near the upper opening 391. The special out ball sensor 35a detects that the game ball 99 has entered the retention box 39, and is, for example, a reflection type optical sensor. As a matter of course, as the special out ball sensor 35a, it is possible to use a known sensor of another type such as a transmission type optical sensor or an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor. Further, the special out ball sensor 35 a may be provided in the special out ball passage 364 of the clune device 36.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the special out ball sensor 35a is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4, and the output from the special out ball sensor 35a is monitored by the MPU 41, so that the MPU 41 plays in the retention box 39. It is determined whether the ball 99 has entered. Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command when the game ball 99 is entered in the retention box 39, and outputs this special out ball detection command in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the special out-ball detection command, the MPU 51 controls the motor 39a to execute the stay box lowering process for moving the stay box 39 downward (FIGS. 76 and 77). reference). Further, when the retention box 39 is moved to the lower limit position, the MPU 51 returns the retention box 39 to the upper limit position after a certain period of time has elapsed. Details of this point will be described later in the stay box return processing of FIG. 78.

  The special out-ball sensor 35a may be connected to the voice lamp control device 5. In this case, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 does not set the special out ball detection command, but the voice lamp controller 5 moves the stay box based on the output from the special out ball sensor 35a.

  Here, FIG. 72A is a front view showing an example of the special main display portion 37a, and FIG. 72B is a view showing a display example of the special main display portion 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (A), the special main display portion 37a is configured by a so-called 7-segment display device, and includes seven segments A to G and dot points DP. Each of the segments A to G and the dot point DP can be individually turned on and off. As shown in FIG. 72 (B), the special main display section 37a displays the game set value stored in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. In the special main display portion 37a, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 by the MPU 41 is read out in the initialization processing or the starting processing executed when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the game setting value is read. The numerical value corresponding to is displayed. Specifically, the special main display portion 37a displays the numeral 1 by turning on the segments B and C when the game setting value is 1, and the segment A when the game setting value is 2. , B, D, E and G are lit to display the number 2, and when the game set value is 3, segments A to D and G are lit to display the number 3 and the game is played. When the set value is 4, segments B, C, F and G are turned on to display the number 4, and when the game set value is 5, segments A, C, D, F and G are turned on. By doing so, the number 5 is displayed, and when the game setting value is 6, the segments A, C to G are turned on and the number 6 is displayed.

  In the special main display portion 37a, after the game setting value is displayed in the initialization process or the starting process, the game setting value is continuously displayed until the main power is turned off. Further, when the game set value is changed, the changed game set value is displayed on the special main display portion 37a. For example, when displaying the changed game set value on the game set value display section 45 in step S1709 of the game set value change processing of FIG. 20, it is possible to display the changed game set value on the special main display section 37a. To be Further, the special main display portion 37a may display at least the numbers 1 to 6, and may be a display other than the 7-segment display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display.

  Here, FIGS. 73 (A) to 73 (C), 74 (A) and 74 (B) are diagrams schematically showing the visual recognition state of the special main display portion 37a at each downward movement level. In these figures, the retention box 39 is shown only in the portion located in front of the special main display portion 37a.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the lower movement level of the retention box 39 is in five stages of lower movement levels 0 to 4. Further, the higher the downward movement level of the retention box 39 (the larger the downward movement level number), the lower the retention box 39 is located, and the larger the area in which the special main display portion 37a can be visually recognized becomes.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), at the lower movement level 0, the retention box 39 is at the upper limit position, and the front side of the special main display portion 37a is entirely covered with the retention box 39, so that the special main The entire display portion 37a is invisible. That is, at the lower level 0, the game set value cannot be determined at all.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (B), in the lower movement level 1, a part (upper half part) of the segment A of the special main display portion 37a is visible. In other words, at the lower level 1, it is possible to confirm whether the segment A is on or off. Then, at the lower level 1, it can be determined that the game setting value is any of 2, 3, 5 and 6 when the segment A is lit, and the game setting value is when the segment A is off. It can be judged to be either 1 or 4. In other words, at the lower level 1, it is possible to determine whether the game set value is 1 or 4 or the game set value is 2, 3, 5 or 6 by turning on or off the segment A. .

  As shown in FIG. 73 (C), at the lower movement level 2, all the segments A of the special main display portion 37a are visible, and some of the segments B and F (upper half portion) are visible. That is, at the lower level 2, it is possible to check the lighting and extinguishing of the segment A and the lighting and extinguishing of the segments B and F. Then, in the lower level 2, if the segment B is turned on and the segments A and F are turned off, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1, and the segments B and F are turned on and the segment A is turned off. It can be determined that the game setting value is 4. Also, when the segments A and B are turned on and the segment F is turned off, it can be determined that the game setting value is 2 or 3, and when the segments A and F are turned on and the segment B is turned off. It can be determined that the game setting value is 5 or 6. In other words, in the lower level 2, the game set value is 1, the game set value is 4, or the game set values are 2 and 3 depending on the combination of turning on and off of each of the segments A, B, and F. It is possible to determine which one of the game setting values 5 and 6 it is.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (A), at the lower level 3, all of the segments A, B, and F of the special main display portion 37a are visible, and part of the segment G (upper half portion) is visible. is there. That is, at the lower level 3, it is possible to confirm the lighting and extinguishing of the segment G in addition to the lighting and extinguishing of the segments A, B, and F. Then, at the lower level 3, if the segment B is turned on and the segments A, F and G are turned off, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1, and the segments B, F and G are turned on and the segment A is turned off. If it is, it can be determined that the game setting value is 4. Further, when the segments A, B and G are turned on and the segment F is turned off, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 2 or 3, and the segments A, F and G are turned on and the segment B is turned off. If it is, it can be determined that the game setting value is 5 or 6. In other words, at the lower level 3, the game set value is 1, the game set value is 4, or the game set value is 2 depending on the combination of turning on and off of each of the segments A, B, F, and G. It is possible to determine which of the three or three or the game setting values 5 and 6 is set.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (B), at the downward movement level 5, the retention box 39 is at the lower limit position, and all seven segments A to G of the special main display portion 37a are visible. That is, at the lower level 0, the game set value can be clearly confirmed.

  Here, FIG. 74 (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of staying game balls in the staying box 39 and the lower movement level of the staying box 39. As shown in FIG. 74 (C), the lower movement level of the stay box 39 is determined according to the number of game balls staying in the stay box 39 (the number of stay game balls). Specifically, the lower level of the stay box 39 is 0 when the stay game ball number is 0, which is the upper limit position of the stay box 39, and is 1 when the stay game ball number is 1, If the number of staying game balls is 2, it is 2, if the number of staying game balls is 3, it is 4, and if the number of staying game balls is 4, the stay box 39 is 4, which is at the lower limit position. As described above, when the retention box 39 is at the lower limit position, the number of retention game balls in the retention box 39 becomes 0 because the game balls retained in the retention box 39 are discharged to the outside, but in this case, The retention box 39 is moved to the upper limit position after a certain time has elapsed since the retention box 39 was moved to the lower limit position.

  Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 when the stay box 39 is moved down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position and returned from the lower limit position to the upper limit position will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. To do.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the sub timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the operation detection process (step S2001) and the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002), similar to the sub timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 27). , Counter update processing (step S2003), command determination processing (step S3301), variable game effect processing (step S2005), and jackpot game effect processing (step S2006). However, the command determination processing (step S3301) of the present embodiment differs from the command determination processing (see FIG. 31) of the first embodiment described above in some steps. Further, in the sub-timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, unlike the sub-timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 27), the retention box return process is executed (step S3302).

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in the command determination processing of the present embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), the received command is a variation pattern command, a jackpot game start command, and a round game start command. If none of the above (No in steps S2302, S2307, and S2310), it is determined whether the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S3401). The special out ball detection command is a command set when it is detected by the special out ball sensor 35a that the game ball 99 has entered the retention box 39 as described above, and in the main process of FIG. In the external output processing of step S1301, the voice lamp control device 5 is transmitted.

  When the received command is the special out-ball detection command (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the stay box lowering process (step S3402).

[Stuck box down processing]
In the stay box lowering process, a process is performed in which the stay box 39 is moved to a position corresponding to a lowering level (see FIG. 74 (C)) corresponding to the number of game balls staying in the stay box 39. Here, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the retention box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 77, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the lower movement level counter added in step S3505, which will be described later, is zero. Here, if the value of the down movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3502, and if the value of the down movement level counter is not 0 (step S3501: No), the process is performed. To step S3504.

<Step S3502>
When the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the stay box return counter to a predetermined value. Here, the stay box return counter is a counter for determining the timing of returning the stay box 39 to the upper limit position corresponding to the downward movement level 0 when the stay box 39 is moved downward, and the stay box return process of FIG. 78 described later. Reference is made in step S3603. The value of the retention box return counter is set to a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 60 seconds) from the start of the downward movement of the retention box 39 to the return to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0). To be done.

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 sets the stay box return standby flag to ON. Here, the retention box return standby flag is a flag that indicates that the retention box 39 is in a standby state for returning to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) when the retention box 39 is moved downward, and the retention box in FIG. Reference is made in step S3601 in the return processing.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the lower movement level counter is 4. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the retention box 39 is moved down to the lower limit position, and determines whether to further move the retention box 39 down. When the value of the downward movement level counter is 4 (step S3504: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the stay box downward movement processing, and when the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), the processing is performed. The process moves to step S3505.

<Steps S3505 and S3506>
When the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No) or when the stay box return standby flag is turned on (step S3503), the MPU 51 sets the value of the downward movement level counter indicated at the position of the stay box 39. One is added (step S3505), and the retention box 39 is moved down to a position corresponding to the lower movement level corresponding to the value of the lower movement level counter after the addition (step S3506). That is, the MPU 51 stays at a position corresponding to a lower moving level that is one level higher than the lower moving level before receiving the special out-ball detection command by controlling the drive pulse input to the motor 39a (see FIG. 71). The box 39 is moved down. For example, when the downward movement level is changed from 0 to 1, the stay box 39 is changed from the upper limit position (see FIG. 73 (A)) that covers the entire front surface of the special main display portion 37a to the special main display portion 37a. The segment A is moved downward to a position where the upper half of the segment A is exposed (see FIG. 73 (B)). When the lowering level is changed from 1 to 2, the retention box 39 is moved downward from the position shown in FIG. 73 (B) to the intermediate position shown in FIG. 73 (C), and the lowering level is changed from 2 to When the number is changed to 3, the intermediate position shown in FIG. 73 (C) is moved down to the position shown in FIG. 74 (A), and when the lowering level is changed from 3 to 4, the position shown in FIG. 74 (A) is changed. 74B to the lower limit position shown in FIG. 74B. When the downward movement level is changed from 0 to 1, it can be inferred that the game set value is any of 2, 3, 5 and 6 when the segment A of the special main display portion 37a is lit, It can be inferred that the game setting value is either 1 or 4 when the segment A is off. Then, when the down movement level is changed from 1 to 3, the number of estimated game setting values is gradually reduced by turning on or off the segment that can be visually recognized according to the down movement level. The set value can be gradually narrowed down. At the lower level 4, all the seven segments A to G of the special main display portion 37a are visible, so that the game set value can be recognized. As a result, the player gradually estimates the game setting value according to the number of special out balls (the number of segments that can be visually recognized on the special main display portion 37a), and the accuracy of the estimation increases as the number of special out balls increases. Since it is possible to improve in stages, it is possible to enjoy the process of estimating the game setting value.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a part or all of the game setting values displayed on the special main display portion 37a can be visually recognized by a simple method of moving the retention box 39 downward. The state can be realized.

  In addition, since the retention box 39 is moved down step by step every time a game ball enters the special out opening 363, the visible area of the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a is gradually expanded. To be done. As a result, the game set value displayed on the special main display portion 37a is gradually revealed, and thus the game set value can be guessed and enjoyed until the game set value can be grasped. As a result, it is possible to improve the motivation for continuing the game until the game set value can be grasped, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Recovery box retention processing]
In the retention box returning process, a process of returning the retention box 39 to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) is performed after a certain time has elapsed since the retention box 39 was moved down to the lower limit position (downward movement level 4). Here, FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the stay box return processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 78, in step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stay box return standby flag that is set to be on in step S3505 in the stay box lowering process of FIG. 77 is set to on. When the stay box return standby flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3602, and when the stay box return standby flag is set to OFF (step S3601: No). , The retention box return processing is ended.

<Steps S3602 and S3603>
When the retention box return standby flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the retention box return counter set in step S3504 in the retention box lowering process of FIG. 77 ( (Step S3602), it is determined whether the value of the stay box return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3603). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a certain period of time has passed since the retention box 39 was moved down to the lower limit position. When the value of the retention box return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3604, and when the value of the retention box return counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3603: No). ), And the retention box return processing is ended.

<Steps S3604 to S3606>
When the value of the stay box return counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 returns the stay box 39 from the lower limit position to the upper limit position by controlling the drive pulse to be input to the motor 39a ( Step S3604). As a result, the time during which the entire special main display portion 37a is displayed is regulated to a fixed time, so that it is possible to prevent the game set value from being left for a long time in a visible state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who is not playing the game from grasping the game setting value. Then, the MPU 51 sets the value of the lower movement level counter to 0 (step S3605), sets the retention box return standby flag to off (step S3606), and ends the retention box return processing.

  By the way, in the gaming machine according to the above-described first embodiment, the game setting value is suggested or specified by the symbol display unit 341 and the sub-image display unit 38. However, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the game setting value is suggested or specified as a part of the effect, so that the game property is poor. In particular, in the jackpot game, although the jackpot game effect is executed in the symbol display portion 341 or the like, if the player who is not interested in the jackpot game effect, the jackpot game consumes a number of round games according to the jackpot type. It is poor in playability.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when hitting the right at the time of a big hit game or the like, the game balls 99 enter the special out nozzle opening 363 of the clune device 36, which is difficult to enter, so that the game balls 99 stay in stages. The box 39 moves downward, and the game set value displayed on the special main display portion 37a can be gradually confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether the game ball 99 in the clune device 36 enters the special out nozzle 363 at the time of right hitting such as a big hit game. Further, when the game ball 99 enters the special out opening 363, the game set value displayed on the special main display portion 37a gradually becomes clear. Therefore, the game set value can be estimated and enjoyed in the process. be able to. As a result, the motivation for continuing the game can be improved until the game set value can be confirmed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the retention box 39 is moved from the upper limit position to the lower limit position by entering the game ball 99 into the special out opening 363 of the clune device 36 (detecting the game ball 99 in the retention box 39). However, the retention box 39 may be moved from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at once by the game ball 99 entering the special out opening 363. In this way, when the game ball is inserted into the special out opening 363, the retention box 39 moves from the upper limit position where the game setting value cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to visually recognize to the lower limit position where the entire game setting value can be visually recognized. Be moved. Therefore, since the game property that the game set value is immediately visible when the game ball enters the special out nozzle 363 is provided, the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  Also, the retention box 39 moves downward each time one game ball 99 enters the special out opening 363, but the retention box 39 steps up each time a plurality of game balls 99 enter the special out opening 363. You may make it move down immediately or all at once. Further, the staying box 39 expands the visible area by moving down, but may move the staying box 39 upward to expand the visible area, or move in the left direction, right direction, diagonal direction, or the like. By doing so, the visual recognition area may be enlarged.

  Further, the weight of the game balls 99 staying in the stay box 39 may lower the stay box 39. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the retention box 39 is biased upward by a biasing means (visual state control means) such as a coil spring. By doing so, the retention box 39 can be moved down stepwise according to the number of game balls retained inside, and the retention box 39 can be moved upward by discharging the game balls of the retention box 39.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the retention box 39 is moved downward when the game ball 99 launched in the right side area of the game board 31 enters the special out opening 363, and thus the special main display portion 37a is displayed. Although the displayed game set value can be visually recognized, the retention box 39 is moved when the game ball 99 launched in the left side area of the game board 31 enters the special out opening 363. The game set value displayed on the special main display portion 37a may be made visible. In this case, the special main display portion 37a, the clune device 36, the retention box 39, and the like are arranged in the left side area or the central area of the game board 31.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game balls 99 are normally distributed to the ball entrance 367 or the special out ball 363 by the clune device 36, but a distribution device having another configuration can also be applied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game set value displayed on the special main display portion 37a can be visually recognized upon the entrance of the game ball 99 into the special out opening 363, but other specific conditions may be set. By satisfying it, the game set value displayed on the special main display portion 37a may be made visible. As other specific conditions, for example, the jackpot lottery number reaches a predetermined number, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is continuously out of the predetermined number, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a predetermined number of jackpots, The total number of game balls to be launched is a certain number or more, the difference ball is a predetermined number or more plus, the difference ball is a predetermined number or more minus. When at least a part of the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a is visible when the specific condition illustrated is satisfied, the player can view at least a part of the game setting value. It becomes possible to anticipate the timing to be performed. As a result, the player can anticipate the timing at which the game setting value is displayed and look forward to the arrival of the timing to proceed with the game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, when the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a is made visible by satisfying other conditions, an opaque plate-shaped member is used as the front position of the special main display portion 37a instead of the retention box 39. By moving the special main display portion 37a downward between the lower position and the upper position, the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a is changed between the invisible state or the invisible state and the visible state. You may do it.

  Further, in the special main display portion 37a, another payout performance of the game set value may be clearly displayed. For example, depending on the display color of the numerical value corresponding to the game setting value on the special main display portion 37a, the blinking pattern of the numerical value, etc., at least one winning hole such as the number of lots per unit jackpot, the base, the ratio of continuous winning characters, and the ratio of winning characters The payout performance based on the above may be specified. In this case, it is conceivable to classify the other payout performances into a plurality of ranks (see, for example, FIG. 37 and FIG. 38) and to clearly indicate the rank. In this way, as the index showing the payout performance, in addition to the game set value, the payout performance other than the game set value is displayed on the special main display portion 37a, so that the game ball 99 to the special out opening 363 is displayed. When a specific condition such as entering a ball is satisfied, it is possible to estimate or grasp other payout performance in addition to the game set value. As a result, the playability is improved, and the motivation for continuing the game can be given.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the game set value is displayed on the special main display portion 37a controlled by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 has been described, but the game set value is displayed on the display by the voice lamp controller 5. Good. As a display in this case, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot matrix display, or the like can be adopted. Then, it is conceivable to display the game set value step by step or at a stretch on the display device that satisfies a specific condition.

  In the present embodiment, instead of or in addition to the game set value, other special performance information, for example, a part or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 is displayed. You may The performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 is displayed on the special main display portion 37a, so that the player can play between the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences in manufacturing the gaming machine 10 or changes over time. It is possible to estimate or recognize the payout performance in which the variation in the payout performance for the winning openings 313 to 316 is reflected. As a result, the player estimates and enjoys the payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316, and when the payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 can be grasped, the player is playing the game based on the performance information. An opportunity is given to determine whether to continue the game on the machine 10.

  Here, as the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316, unit jackpot lottery number information, base information, continuous character ratio information, character ratio information and the like can be mentioned.

  Since the unit jackpot lottery number is an index showing the easiness of the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state (state with low probability mode and not high frequency support mode), part or all of the unit jackpot lottery number information is a special main By being displayed on the display unit 37a, it becomes possible to know the easiness of receiving the jackpot lottery. Thereby, the player can enjoy by estimating the number of unit jackpot lottery, and if the number of unit jackpot lottery can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine based on the number of unit jackpot lottery. The opportunity to do is given.

  Since the base information is an index showing the ease of winning the prize in the first winning opening 314 and the general winning opening 313, a part or all of the base information is displayed on the special main display portion 37a, so that the first It becomes possible to know the ease of winning the prize in the prize winning hole 314 and the general prize winning hole 313. As a result, the player is given an opportunity to infer the base and enjoy it, and if the base can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in play based on the base.

  The continuous character ratio information is the frequency at which the lottery result in the big hit lottery will shift to the big hit game state (the stay ratio in the big hit game state), and the easiness of winning a prize at the variable winning port 316 (in the special game state). It is an index showing the ball yield). Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the continuous winning character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the continuous winning character ratio, so that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot gaming state. It becomes possible to know the frequency of the winning and the ease of winning the prize at the variable winning port 316. Thereby, the player can enjoy by guessing the continuous character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine in play based on the continuous character ratio. The opportunity to do is given.

  The character ratio information is the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot drawing shifts to the jackpot gaming state (the jackpot gaming state staying rate), the staying rate in the high-frequency support mode in which the electric auditors role 315b is supported, and variable. This is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the winning opening 316 and the second winning opening 315 (ball-out rate in the jackpot gaming state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the character ratio, so that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is transferred to the jackpot gaming state. It becomes possible to know the frequency, the stay ratio in the high frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 315b is supported, and the easiness of winning the variable winning port 316 and the second winning port 315. As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess the character ratio and enjoy it, and if the character ratio can be grasped, an opportunity to judge whether to continue the game on the gaming machine based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the above-described fifth embodiment, the game set value is displayed on the special main display portion 37a, and the game set value is made visible by the downward movement of the retention box 39 arranged on the front side of the special main display portion 37a. The case was explained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a translucent monitor is arranged on the front side of the special main display portion where the game set value is displayed, and the game set value is changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor. Is different from the above-described fifth embodiment in that the visibility is changed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described fifth embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 79 is a front view showing an example of the clune device of the gaming machine and its periphery according to the present embodiment, FIG. 80 is a sectional view taken along the line X4-X4 in FIG. 79, and FIG. It is a perspective view showing an example of indicator 37a and translucent monitor 39A.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, similarly to the fifth embodiment described above, the clune device 36, the discharge port 319, on the right side of the symbol display portion 341 in the game board 31, Also, a special main display portion 37a is provided. However, in this embodiment, the retention box 39 in the fifth embodiment described above is not provided, and instead of this retention box 39, a translucent monitor 39A (translucent display device) is provided. There is.

  The clune device 36 has the same structure as the clune device 36 of the fifth embodiment described above, but a guide member 370 is connected to the special out ball passage 364. The guide member 370 guides the game ball 99 introduced into the special out ball passage 364 to the back side of the game board 31, and is also connected to the discharge port 319.

  The translucent monitor 39A has a low visible light transmittance in the entire monitor and is invisible or difficult to view the back side in a low transmittance state (light-shielding state), and a high visible light transmittance in the entire monitor is visible in the back side. It is possible to change the visible light transmittance between the possible high transmittance states (transparent state). The translucent monitor 39A is in a light-shielding state by displaying a single color such as black or white. Further, the translucent monitor 39A can realize a semi-transparent state that is a plurality of intermediate visible light transmittances between the light-shielded state and the transparent state. The translucent monitor 39A is, for example, a transparent flat display such as an organic EL display or a liquid crystal display that can realize a transparent state, and adjusts the voltage applied to the monitor electrodes, the presence or absence of voltage application to each dot, etc. It is possible to change the visible light transmittance in. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the translucent monitor 39A is fixedly arranged in front of the special main display portion 37a. Therefore, by selecting the visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A, it is possible to select a state in which the display content of the special main display portion 37a is invisible or difficult to see, and further visible. It is possible to adjust the degree of visibility (visibility level) in a visible state.

  Here, FIG. 81B is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A and the visual recognition state of the special main display portion 37a. The visual recognition level is an index indicating the visibility behind the translucent monitor 39A and correlates with the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (B), the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A has five levels from 0 to 4. Also, the higher the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A (the larger the visual recognition level number), the higher the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A and the higher the visibility of the special main display portion 37a. At the visibility level 0, since the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is low and the back of the translucent monitor 39A cannot be visually recognized, the display content on the special main display portion 37a cannot be confirmed at all. On the other hand, at the visual recognition level 4, since the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is high and the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible, the display content on the special main display portion 37a can be confirmed without any problem. .

  Here, FIG. 81C is a diagram showing the relationship between the special out-ball count number and the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor. The special out ball count number is the count number of the game balls 99 entered in the special out opening 363 of the clune device 36. The special out ball count number is counted based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 35a, but is cleared to 0 when the count number becomes 4.

  As shown in FIG. 81C, the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A is determined according to the special out ball count number counted based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 35a. Specifically, when the special out ball count number is 0, the visible level of the translucent monitor 39A is 0 at which the back of the translucent monitor 39A is invisible or difficult to visually recognize, and the special out ball count number is When the number of special out balls is 1, it is 2, when the number of special out balls is 2, it is 3 when the number of special out balls is 3, and when the number of special out balls is 4, The backside of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible 4.

  In addition, when the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A becomes 4 where the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible, the visual check is performed without waiting for the next game ball 99 to enter the special out opening 363. After a certain time after the level becomes 4, the back of the translucent monitor 39A is set to 0, which is invisible or difficult to view.

  Next, a process executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp controller 5 when changing the visual recognition level (visible light transmittance) of the translucent monitor 39A will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the sub timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the operation detection process (step S2001) and the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002), similar to the sub timer interrupt process of the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 75). , Counter update processing (step S2003), command determination processing (step S3701), variable game effect processing (step S2005), and jackpot game effect processing (step S2006) are executed. However, the command determination process (step S3301) of the present embodiment differs from the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the fifth embodiment described above in some steps. Further, in the sub-timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, instead of the retention box return process of the sub-timer interrupt process of the fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 75), the light blocking control process is executed (step S3702). ).

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in the command determination processing of the present embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), the received command is a variation pattern command, a jackpot game start command, and a round game start command. If none of the above (No in all of steps S2302, S2307, and S2310), it is determined whether the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S3801). The special out ball detection command is a command set when the special out ball sensor 35a detects that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 363, and step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of.

  When the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the visual recognition control process (step S3802).

[Visual control processing]
In the visual recognition control processing, processing for controlling the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is performed so that the visual recognition level (see FIG. 81 (C)) corresponds to the special out-ball count number. Here, FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the visual recognition control process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Steps S3901 and S3902>
As shown in FIG. 84, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter (step S3901), and according to the visual recognition level corresponding to the value of the special out ball counter after the addition, the visible light of the translucent monitor 39A. The light transmittance is controlled (step S3902). That is, the MPU 51 adjusts the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visual recognition level one level higher than the visual recognition level before receiving the special out-ball detection command by controlling the voltage value or the like applied to the translucency monitor 39A. (See FIG. 81 (B)).

<Step S3903>
In step S3903, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the special out ball counter is 4. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is the maximum transparency at which the back of the translucent monitor 39A can be completely visually recognized. When the value of the visual recognition level counter is 4 (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3904, and when the value of the visual recognition level counter is not 4 (step S3903: No), ends the visual recognition control processing. To do.

<Step S3904>
When the value of the visual recognition level counter is 4 (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the light-shielding start counter to a predetermined value (step S3904). Here, the light-shielding start counter is completely invisible behind the translucent monitor 39A from the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visual level 4 (transparent state) in which the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible. This counter is for determining the timing of changing the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visually-recognizable level 0 (light-shielding state), which is difficult to visually recognize, and is referred to in step S4003 in the light-shielding control processing in FIG. 85 described later. The value of the light-shielding start counter is set to a value corresponding to a fixed time (for example, 1 second to 60 seconds) from when the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is set to 4 to when the visibility level is returned to 0.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 sets the light-shielding start standby flag to on, and ends the visual recognition control process. Here, the light-shielding start standby flag is a flag indicating that the light-transmitting monitor 39A is on standby for changing the visual recognition level to 0, and is referred to in step S4001 in the light-shielding process in FIG. 85 described later. It

[Shading control processing]
In the light-shielding control process, a process of changing the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A to 4 after the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A is set to 4 and a certain period of time has elapsed is executed. Here, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the light-shielding control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 82.

<Step S4001>
As shown in FIG. 85, in step S4001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the light-shielding start standby flag, which is set to ON in step S3905 in the visual recognition control process of FIG. 84 described later, is set to ON. If the light-shielding start standby flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4002, and if the light-shielding start standby flag is set to OFF (step S4001: No), The retention box return processing ends.

<Steps S4002 and S4003>
When the light-shielding start standby flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the light-shielding start counter set in step S3904 in the visual recognition control process of FIG. 84 (step S4002), It is determined whether or not the value of the light-shielding start counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4003). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a certain period of time has passed since the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A was set to 4. When the value of the light-shielding start counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4004, and when the value of the light-shielding start counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4003: No), The light shielding control process is ended.

<Steps S4004 to S4006>
When the value of the light-shielding start counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 controls the level of the voltage value applied to the light-transmissive monitor 39A and the like to keep the light-transmissive monitor 39A in the light-shielded state. The visible light transmittance corresponding to a certain visual recognition level 0 is set (step S4004). As a result, the time during which the entire special main display portion 37a is completely visible is regulated to a fixed time, so that it is possible to prevent the game set value from being left for a long time in a visible state. Then, the MPU 51 sets the value of the special out-ball counter to 0 (step S4005), sets the light-shielding start standby flag to off (step S4006), and ends the stay box return process.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, at the time of right hitting such as a big hit game, the game ball 99 enters the special out mouth 363 of the clune device 36, which is difficult to enter, in stages. The retention box 39 moves downward, and the game set value displayed on the special main display portion 37a can be gradually confirmed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment, the translucent monitor 39A is provided on the front side of the special main display section where the game set value is displayed instead of the stay box 39 in the fifth embodiment. Are arranged, and the visibility of the game set value is changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A. In addition, the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A is stepwise by entering the game ball 99 into the special out opening 363 of the clune device 36, which is difficult to enter when hitting the right in a big hit game or the like. Is changed to. Therefore, like the fifth embodiment described above, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether the game ball 99 in the clune device 36 enters the special out ball hole 363 at the time of right hitting such as a big hit game. . Further, when the game ball 99 enters the special out opening 363, the game set value displayed on the special main display portion 37a gradually becomes clear. Therefore, the game set value can be estimated and enjoyed in the process. be able to. As a result, the motivation for continuing the game can be improved until the game set value can be confirmed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the visual recognition level is adjusted by adjusting the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A, but according to the display color of each segment on the special main display portion 37a, It is also possible to adjust the visual recognition level by adjusting the display color of the entire translucent monitor 39A.

  It is also conceivable to partially change the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A to adjust the visual recognition level stepwise between the light-shielded state and the transparent state. For example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (D), from the state where the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A is low (the light shielding state) to the transparent region where the visible light transmittance is high, The entire transparent monitor 39A can be made transparent eventually.

The example of FIG. 86 (A) is a pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the upper side to the lower side of the translucent monitor 39A, and the example of FIG. 86 (B) shows the pattern of FIG. 86 (A). Contrary to the pattern, this is a pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the lower side to the upper side of the translucent monitor 39A. The example in FIG. 86C is a pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the right side to the left side of the translucent monitor 39A. A pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the left side to the right side is also conceivable. Also, the example of FIG. 86 (D) is a pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the upper left corner side of the translucent monitor 39A to the diagonally lower right corner side, which is not shown. A pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the other corner side of the translucent monitor 39A toward the diagonal corner side is also conceivable.
In this way, even when the transparent area is increased stepwise by entering the game ball 99 into the special out nozzle 363, the game set value displayed on the special main display portion 37a becomes gradually clear, In the process, it can be enjoyed by guessing the game set value. As a result, the motivation for continuing the game can be improved until the game set value can be grasped, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, by increasing the visible light transmittance as a whole while giving a gradation to the visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A, it is possible to change the visual recognition level between the light blocking state and the transparent state. Conceivable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of preset areas may be set as transparent areas in a predetermined order each time a specific condition is satisfied while the light-transmitting monitor 39A is changed from the light-shielding state to the transparent state. Conceivable. For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), it is conceivable that the plurality of areas are set in portions corresponding to the respective segments A to G in the special main display portion 37a. Specifically, the central portion of each segment A to G is set as a region A to a region G that can be a transparent region, and one of the regions A to G is transparent every time a specific condition is satisfied. It may be possible to determine whether or not each segment is lit by setting the area. Here, FIG. 87 (B) is an example of a case where the areas A to G are changed to transparent areas in this order every time a specific condition is satisfied. In this way, by setting the regions A to G as the transmissive regions while changing the translucency monitor 39A from the light shielding state to the transparent state, it is possible to estimate the game setting value stepwise.

  Note that the order in which the areas A to G are the transparent areas is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 87 (B), and may be set as appropriate, and may be determined according to, for example, the game set value, or the game set value. It may be determined according to other factors (for example, a payout performance such as a base other than the game setting value), or may be determined by a lottery. Further, when a specific condition is satisfied, the area is not limited to one of the areas A to G, and two or more areas may be transparent areas. Further, it is not necessary to set all the regions A to G as the transmissive regions while the translucent monitor 39A is changed from the light shielding state to the transparent state, and it is conceivable that some regions are sequentially set as the transmissive regions. In this case, the order of setting the partial area as the transparent area may be appropriately determined according to the game set value and the like, as in the case described above. Further, the plurality of areas are not limited to the areas A to G corresponding to the respective segments A to G in the special main display portion 37a, and may be set on the front side of a portion other than the respective segments A to G. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of stages until the game setting value can be grasped, and it is possible to enjoy which of the areas A to G and the other areas are transparent areas when a specific condition is satisfied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the translucent monitor 39A is changed stepwise from the light blocking state to the transparent state, but it may be changed at once from the light blocking state to the transparent state.

  Also in the present embodiment, the number of unit jackpot lottery, the base, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, etc. are determined by the display color of the numerical value corresponding to the game setting value on the special main display portion 37a, the blinking pattern of the numerical value, and the like. The payout performance based on at least one winning opening may be specified.

[Seventh Embodiment]
In the above-described fifth embodiment, the game setting value is displayed on the special main display portion 37a, and the game setting value is invisible when the retention box 39 arranged on the front side of the special main display portion 37a is at the upper limit position. Or, it is considered difficult, and the case where the stay box 39 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position step by step so that a part or all of the game set value can be visually recognized has been described. Further, in the above-described fifth embodiment, the case where the retention box 39 is returned to the upper limit position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the downward movement of the retention box 39 was described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the operation of the stay box is checked after the main power is turned on and the stay box is driven during the big hit game, a drive abnormality occurs in the stay box arranged on the front side of the special main display portion. It is different from the above-described fifth embodiment in that it is determined whether or not a drive abnormality has occurred and abnormality processing is executed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 96, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above.

  Here, FIG. 88 is a front view showing an enlarged main part of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X5-X5 of FIG. 88, and FIG. 90 is a forced discharge member in an operating position. FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 89 in a certain case, and FIG. 91 is a cross-sectional view of a region including a stay box and a special main display portion in the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same basic configuration as that of the fifth embodiment described above, but enters the special out mouthpiece 363 of the clune device 36. Then, the game ball 99 (special out ball) discharged from the special out ball passage 364 can be discharged to the back surface side of the game board 31 without being retained in the retention box 39. Therefore, in a situation where it is not desirable for the game balls 99 to be retained in the retention box 39, for example, a failure of the motor 39a for driving the retention box 39, a drive mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 39a to the retention box 39, and the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from being retained in the retention box 39 in a situation where the retention box 39 may not be moved down to the lower level 4 due to a failure. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from overflowing from the retention box 39 or the game ball 99 from retaining in the special out ball passage 364.

  The gaming machine 10 includes a forced ejection member 319B, an upper limit position detection sensor 40A, a lower limit position detection sensor 40B, and a translucent monitor 39A. Further, a cutout 319A is provided on the back side of the lower end portion of the special out ball passage 364 of the clune device 36, and a forced discharge port 319C is provided above the special main display portion 37a of the game board 31. The notch 319A and the forced ejection port 319C define a space for ejecting the special out ball passage 364 of the clune device 36 to the game board 31. Further, on the back surface side of the game board 31, a discharge path 319D for guiding the game ball 99 that has passed through the forced discharge port 319C to a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 35 is provided.

  The forced ejection member 319B is movable in the front-rear direction D1 between a standby position (see FIG. 89) and an operating position (see FIG. 90) by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. As shown in FIG. 89, in the standby position, the forcible discharge member 319B does not exist between the special out ball passage 364 and the retention box 39, and enters the special out ball opening 363 of the clune device 36 to enter the special out ball. The game ball 99 (special out ball) discharged from the passage 364 can enter the retention box 39. Normally, the forced ejection member 319B is in the standby position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89, in the operating position, the forced discharge member 319B exists between the special out ball passage 364 and the retention box 39, and the game ball 99 (special out ball) discharged from the special out ball passage 364. ) Can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31, and the special out balls are restricted from entering the retention box 39. The forced ejection member 319B is moved to the operating position when there is an abnormal drive of the retention box 39. Then, the game ball 99 whose entry into the retention box 39 is restricted by the forced ejection member 319B is forcibly ejected to the back side of the game board 31 via the notch 319A and the forced ejection port 319C.

  Note that the forced ejection member 319B is not limited to the structure that is movable in the front-rear direction D1 and may have another structure. For example, the forced ejection member 319B is movable between a closed position that closes the forced ejection port 319C and a closed position that opens the forced ejection port 319C, and if the forced ejection member 319B is in the open position, a special out ball A configuration existing between the passage 364 and the retention box 39 is also conceivable.

  The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are used to detect the position of the stay box 39. The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are optical sensors such as a reflection type sensor and an illuminance sensor, and are connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the outputs of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B can be monitored by the MPU 51. The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B may be connected to the input / output I / F 42 of the main controller 4. In this case, commands corresponding to the outputs from the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are transmitted from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, so that the position of the retention box 39 in the voice lamp control device 5 is increased. Is grasped.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 (A) to 91 (C), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A is provided above the special main display portion 37a, and when the retention box 39 is at the lower movement level 0, the retention box 39 is detected. The presence of the retention box 39 can be detected, and the presence of the retention box 39 cannot be detected when the retention box 39 is in the lower movement level 1 to 4. On the other hand, the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is provided below the discharge port 319 and can detect the existence of the retention box 39 when the retention box 39 is at the lower level 4, and the retention box 39 is at the lower levels 0 to 3. In some cases, the presence of the retention box 39 cannot be detected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A outputs a high level signal (H) when the downward movement level is 0 while the upper limit position detection sensor 40A is operating normally. A low level signal (L) is output in the case of the lower movement levels 1 to 4. Further, the lower limit position detection sensor 40B outputs a high level signal (H) in the case of the lower movement level 4 when operating normally, and outputs a high level signal (H) in the case of the lower movement level 0-3. L) is output. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92B, when the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are operating normally, the output levels of the signals output from these detection sensors 40A and 40B are changed. The combination is HL at the lower motion level 0, LL at the lower motion level 1 to 3, and LH at the lower motion level 4.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the translucency monitor 39A is arranged on the front side of the special main display portion 37a and controls the visibility of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values displayed on the special main display portion 37a. To do. The translucent monitor 39A is similar to the translucent monitor 39A of the sixth embodiment described above, and the visible light transmittance is changed by being controlled by the MPU 51. As a result, the special main display portion 37a has a high visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A so that the display content can be visually recognized, and a state in which the visible light transmittance at the translucent monitor 39A is low and the display content cannot be visually recognized. Alternatively, the visibility is controlled with respect to the difficult state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92C, the translucent monitor 39A is in a normal state in which the display content on the special main display portion 37a can be visually recognized when the retention box 39 is normally driven. When a drive abnormality has occurred in the retention box 39, the display content on the special main display portion 37a is set to a visually restricted state where it is invisible or difficult.

  Here, when the retention box 39 is not normally driven, the lower movement level grasped by the value of the lower movement level counter and the lower movement level grasped by the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B. It means that there is a difference between them. For example, when the retention box 39 is not moved up and down due to a malfunction of the motor 39a and the drive mechanism, the retention box 39 is moved up and down, but when the value of the downward movement level counter and the detection sensors 40A and 40B are different. This corresponds to the case where the retention box 39 is not normally driven. Then, in the present embodiment, as described below, during the startup process and the jackpot game executed when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the operation check of the retention box is performed by the voice lamp control device 5. Is executed. In addition, the operation check of the stay box 39 is, in addition to the start-up process and the jackpot game, for example, after a certain period of time has elapsed after the launch of the game ball 99 in the gaming machine 10 has been stopped, a demonstration effect is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like. When it is executed, such as when the RTC (real time clock) effect is executed in the symbol display diagram 341 or the like at a predetermined predetermined time, it is executed at a timing at which the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the retention box 39 is moved. You may.

  Instead of the translucent monitor 39A, it may be possible to make the number corresponding to the game setting value displayed on the special main display section 37a invisible or difficult by other means. For example, the special main display portion 37a may be hidden by a movable member other than the stay box 39, the special main display portion 37a is configured to be movable, and the special main display portion 37a is provided on the back side of the stay box 39 or the like. The special main display portion 37a may be moved to the invisible or difficult position by moving it. Further, it may be considered that the game set value cannot be grasped by turning off the power of the special main display portion 37a. In addition, instead of the translucent monitor 39A, it may be possible to make the special main display portion 37a invisible or difficult by an optical action. For example, an optical member such as a light guide member or a diffusing member is arranged on the front side of the special main display portion 37a, and light from a light source is injected into this optical member to make the special main display portion 37a invisible or difficult. It is also possible. On the contrary, the special main display part 37a can be visually recognized by turning on the light source and supplying the light from the light source to the optical member, while the special main display part 37a cannot be visually recognized by turning off the light source. Or it may be difficult.

[Processing of voice lamp controller 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. The processing in the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is basically the same as that in the above-described first embodiment, but in this embodiment, processing for checking the drive state of the retention box 39 is executed. Specifically, for example, when the retention box operation check process is executed in the startup process executed when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the retention box 39 is moved down in the retention box lowering process, and When the retention box 39 is moved upward in the retention box recovery process, an operation check is performed to see if the drive state of the retention box 39 is normal.

[Stuck box operation check processing]
In the stay box operation check process, it is determined whether the stay box 39 is operating normally or not, provided that the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are operating normally. It is checked using the position detection sensor 40B. That is, the stay box operation check process is executed after the operation check whether there is an abnormality in the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B. The operation check of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is performed by, for example, blinking a light source for operation check arranged near each of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B, or moving the movable body. Is moved, and is performed based on the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at that time. Here, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of a stay box operation check process procedure executed in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

<Steps S4101 to S4105>
As shown in FIG. 93, the MPU 51 moves the retention box 39 to the lower movement level 4 (lower limit position) (step S4101), and after a predetermined time has elapsed (step S4102: Yes), returns the retention box 39 to the upper limit position. (Step S4103). Here, after moving the retention box 39 to the lower limit position and returning it to the upper limit position after a predetermined time, it is possible that the game ball 99 remains in the retention box 39 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Because there is a nature. In other words, for example, when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off during the big hit game, it is possible that the staying box 39 is stopped at the downward movement level 0 to 3 while the gaming ball 99 is staying in the staying box 39. is there. Therefore, by moving the retention box 39 to the lower limit position and returning it to the upper limit position after a predetermined time, it is possible to achieve a state in which the game ball 99 does not exist inside the retention box 39, and to move the retention box 39 to the lower movement level 0. It is possible to wait at the upper limit position. Further, the predetermined time for stopping the retention box 39 at the lower limit position which is the lower movement level 4 is set to the time required for discharging the game balls 99 retained in the retention box 39, and is, for example, about 2 to 10 seconds. is there.

  Then, the MPU 51 sets the value of the downward movement level counter to 0 (step S4104) when the stay box 39 is returned to the downward movement level 0 (step S4103), and the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B. Of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B are stored as those for the down-moving level 0 (step S4105).

<Steps S4106 to S4109>
Next, the MPU 51 gradually moves the retention box 39 to the downward movement levels 1 to 4 (step S4106) until the retention box 39 is moved down to the downward movement level 4 (step S4109: Yes), and the retention box 39 is moved. 1 is added to the value of the down-movement level counter every time when is moved down (step S4107), and the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at each down-movement level is stored (step S4108).

<Steps S4110 to S4116>
The MPU 51 determines whether or not the values of the lower level counter are all 0 to 4 and the combination of the output levels is the combination when the retention box 39 is operating normally (see FIG. 92 (B)). (Steps S4110-4114). When the value of the lower level counter is all 0 to 4 and the combination of the output levels corresponds to the normal operation combination (Yes in all of steps S4110 to 4114), the retention box 39 Is determined to be normally driven, the stagnation box 39 is returned to the upper limit position where the downward movement level is 0 (step S4115), and the value of the downward movement level counter is set to 0 (step S4116). The box operation check process ends.

  On the other hand, the MPU 51 does not correspond to the combination in which the output level combination in which the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4 is operating normally (No in any of steps S4110 to 4114). ), Since it can be determined that the drive state of the retention box 39 is abnormal, error processing is executed (step S4117), and the retention box operation check processing is terminated. Here, the cause of the abnormality in the drive state of the retention box 39 is, for example, the abnormality of the motor 39a or the drive system for moving the retention box 39 up or down, and the following when the motor 39a or the drive system is normal. There may be a mismatch between the value of the motion level counter and the lower motion level detected by the detection sensors 40A and 40B. The error processing will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 94.

[Error handling]
In the error processing, the abnormal processing according to the abnormal state of the drive state of the retention box 39 is executed. Here, FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of an error processing procedure executed in the stay box operation check processing of FIG.

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 94, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LH when the value of the lower movement level counter is 0 to 4 (step S4201). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always LH, regardless of the value of the lower level counter. When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LH when the value of the lower movement level counter is 0 to 4 (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 detects the detection sensor regardless of the value of the lower movement level counter. The combination of the outputs of 40A and 40B is always LH, and it is determined that a drive abnormality in which the retention box 39 is fixed at the lower limit position which is the lower movement level 4 and does not move occurs, so the first drive in step S4202. Process shifts to abnormal process. On the other hand, when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4 is not LH (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LH when the value of the lower level counter is 0 to 4 (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first drive abnormality process (step S4202). , The error processing ends. Here, when there is a drive abnormality in which the retention box 39 is fixed at the lower limit position which is the downward movement level 4 and does not move, the display content of the special main display portion 37a is always visible. Therefore, in the first drive abnormality processing, the MPU 51 displays the translucent monitor 39A arranged on the front side of the special main display section 37a from the normal state in which the display content on the special main display section 37a can be visually confirmed. The display content of the portion 37a is switched to a visually restricted state in which the displayed content is invisible or difficult (see FIG. 92 (C)). As a result, even if the retention box 39 does not move from the lower limit position which is the lower level 4, it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize the display content (game setting value) on the special main display portion 37a. Therefore, when the retention box 39 does not move at the lower limit position which is the lower level 4, the special main display portion is displayed even though the game ball 99 has not entered the special out opening 363 of the clune device 36. It is possible to prevent the game set value from being recognized by the player because the display content on 37a is always visible.

  Further, the MPU 51 may notify that the retention box 39 does not move in the first drive abnormality processing. In this case, for example, an image indicating that the retention box 39 is abnormally driven is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and a sound indicating that the retention box 39 is abnormally driven is output from the speaker 26. Therefore, it may be possible to notify that the drive error of the retention box 39 has occurred. As a result, the game hall side can know that the drive error of the retention box 39 has occurred.

  In addition, on condition that there is no abnormality in the elements other than the retention box 39, the game hall side selects whether to shift to a customer waiting state in which the game can be played by the player or disable the game by the player. It is also possible to do so. For example, in addition to the image indicating that the retention box 39 has a drive abnormality, an image for selecting whether to shift to the customer waiting state is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and the upper plate 23 and the like are displayed. It is conceivable that it is possible to select whether or not to shift to the customer waiting state on the game hall side by the operation button 20 or the cross key (not shown) provided on the. Thereby, when there is no abnormality other than the drive abnormality of the retention box 39 and there is no problem in executing the game, it is possible to leave the determination of whether or not the player uses the gaming machine 10 to the gaming hall side. It will be possible.

  Then, when the game hall side selects the customer waiting state, the technology of the sixth embodiment is applied to determine the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 363 of the clune device 36 (the number of special out balls). Accordingly, the visibility of the display content of the special main display portion 37a may be changed by selecting the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A. For example, a special main display unit is provided by providing a sensor such as a proximity sensor for detecting the game ball 99 near the forced discharge port 319C, and changing the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A based on the output of this sensor. The visibility of 37a may be changed. In this case, even if the retention box 39 does not move at the lower limit position which is the lower level 4, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with a game property that allows the user to infer or recognize the game setting value. Further, instead of the translucency monitor 39A, when the number corresponding to the game set value displayed on the special main display portion 37a is made invisible or difficult by other means, similarly, the special means is used by the other means. The visibility of the main display portion 37a may be changed.

<Step S4203>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the lower level counter is 0 to 4 is not LH (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 has all the values of the lower level counter of 0 to 4. It is determined whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B in HL is HL (step S4203). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always HL regardless of the value of the lower level counter. When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B for all the values of the lower movement level counter 0 to 4 is HL (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 51 detects the detection sensor regardless of the value of the lower movement level counter. The combination of the outputs of 40A and 40B is always HL, and it is determined that there is a drive abnormality in which the retention box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position of the downward movement level 0 and does not move, so the second drive of step S4204. Process shifts to abnormal process. On the other hand, when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4 is not HL (step S4203: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4205.

<Step S4204>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL when the value of the lower movement level counter is 0 to 4 (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second drive abnormality process (step S4204). , The error processing ends. Here, when the retention box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position of the lower level 0 and a drive abnormality that does not move occurs, when the game ball 99 is introduced into the retention box 39, the game ball 99 of the retention box 39 Cannot be discharged. Therefore, in the second drive abnormality processing, the MPU 51 moves the forced ejection member 319B from the standby position (see FIG. 89) to the operating position (see FIG. 90). As a result, the forced ejection member 319B exists between the special out ball passage 364 and the retention box 39. Therefore, in the jackpot game, the game ball 99 (special out ball) that enters the special out ball opening 363 of the clune device 36 and is discharged from the discharge path 319D is restricted from entering the retention box 39 by the forced discharge member 319B. To be done. Then, the game ball 99 whose entry into the retention box 39 is restricted by the forced discharge member 319B is forcedly discharged to the back side of the game board 31 via the forced discharge member 319B, the forced discharge port 319C, and the discharge path 319D. . As a result, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out nozzle 363 is prevented from entering the retention box 39. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls 99 from exceeding the capacity in the retention box 39 and prevent the game balls 99 from overflowing from the retention box 39, and to the special out ball passage 364 of the clune device 36. It is possible to prevent jamming. Therefore, even when a drive abnormality occurs in which the retention box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position of the downward movement level 0 and does not move, it is possible to execute the game in the gaming machine 10 as usual.

  Further, in the second drive abnormality processing, similarly to the case of the first drive processing, it may be notified that the retention box 39 does not move. In this case as well, similar to the case of the first drive processing, it may be possible to select whether to shift to the customer waiting state on the game hall side.

<Step S4205>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4 is neither LH nor HL (No in steps S4201 and S4203), all of the downward movement levels 0 to 4 It is determined whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LL (step S4205). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always LL regardless of the downward movement levels 0 to 4. When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all the lower movement levels 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 detects the detection sensors 40A and 40B regardless of the lower movement levels 0 to 4. Since the combination of outputs is always LL, and it is determined that a drive abnormality occurs in which the retention box 39 is fixed at a position corresponding to any of the lower movement levels 1 to 3 and does not move, the third step of step S4206 is performed. The processing shifts to drive abnormality processing. On the other hand, when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not LL at any of the lower movement levels 0 to 4 (step S4205: No), the MPU 51 detects the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the detection sensor. Since it is determined that a link abnormality having a lower movement level based on 40A and 40B has occurred, the processing shifts to the link abnormality processing in step S4207.

<Step S4206>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the third drive abnormality process (step S4206). ), And ends the error processing. Here, when the retention box 39 is fixed at a position corresponding to any one of the lower movement levels 1 to 3 and a drive abnormality that does not move occurs, a part of the display content of the special main display portion 37a can always be visually recognized. In addition to being in such a state, when the game ball 99 is introduced into the retention box 39, the game ball 99 in the retention box 39 cannot be discharged. Therefore, in the third drive abnormality process, the MPU 51 executes the same process as the second drive abnormality process in addition to the same process as the first drive abnormality process. Specifically, the MPU 51 changes the translucent monitor 39A arranged on the front side of the special main display unit 37a from the normal state in which the display content on the special main display unit 37a is visible to the special main display unit 37a. The display content is switched to a visually restricted state where the display contents are invisible or difficult (see FIG. 92C), and the forced ejection member 319B is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 89) to the operating position (see FIG. 90). As a result, even if the retention box 39 does not move at any of the downward movement levels 1 to 3, it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize the display content (game setting value) on the special main display portion 37a. Also, in the jackpot game, the game ball 99 (special out ball) that enters the special out ball opening 363 of the clune device 36 and is discharged from the discharge path 319D is forcibly discharged to the back side of the game board 31 and stored in the retention box 39. It is possible to prevent the game balls from staying.

<Step S4207>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4 is neither LH nor HL (No in all of steps S4201, S4203 and S4205), the MPU 51 determines that the link is abnormal. The process is executed (step S4207), and the error process is ended. Here, when a link abnormality occurs in which the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the lower movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B are different (except when the retention box 39 does not move), the retention occurs. The box 39 cannot be operated normally. Therefore, in the link abnormality processing, the MPU 51 moves the retention box 39 to the position of the lower movement level based on the detection result of the detection sensors 40A and 40B. For example, when the combination of the output levels from the detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL, the retention box 39 is moved to the upper limit position of the downward movement level 0. In addition, when the process of matching the link between the lower level based on the value of the lower level counter and the lower level based on the detection result of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is executed, the stay box operation check process is executed again. , It is preferable to check whether the links are consistent. If it is determined that the links do not match even after the retention box operation check process is performed again, there is a possibility that the retention box 39 cannot move to a part of the lower movement level position. You may make it notify that it is not solved. In this case as well, the game hall side may be allowed to select whether to shift to the customer waiting state. Further, if the link abnormality is not resolved, the third drive abnormality processing may be executed.

  By the way, when the visibility of the special main display portion 37a is changed by the vertical movement of the retention box 39, it is assumed that the abnormality of the motor 39a or the drive system connected to the retention box 39 causes an abnormality in the drive of the retention box 39. To be done. In this case, when the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lower movement level 0, the game ball inside the retention box 39 cannot be discharged. When the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lower level 4, the entire special main display portion 37a remains visible, so that the game set value is grasped. When the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lower movement levels 1 to 3, not only the part of the special main display portion 37a remains visible, but also the game ball inside the retention box 39 cannot be discharged. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, an operation check process is performed to determine whether or not a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 has occurred. Then, when a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 occurs, an abnormality process is executed according to the position (downward movement level) where the drive of the retention box 39 is stopped. Specifically, when the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lower level 0, the forced ejection member 319B is operated to allow the special out balls to be forcedly ejected to the back side of the game board 31. The game ball 99 is prevented from entering the retention box 39. Further, when the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lower level 4, the special main display portion 37a is made invisible or difficult by reducing the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A. When the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lower movement levels 1 to 3, the forced ejection member 319B is activated and the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is lowered. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the game ball inside the retention box 39 cannot be discharged, and prevent all or part of the special main display portion 37a from remaining visible. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the game on the gaming machine 10 even when the drive abnormality of the retention box 39 occurs.

[Stuck box down processing]
In the stay box lowering process of the present embodiment, similarly to the fifth embodiment described above, the position is set to a position corresponding to the lowering level (see FIG. 74 (C)) corresponding to the number of game balls staying in the stay box 39. The process of moving down the retention box 39 is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is confirmed that the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the lower movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B are matched before lowering the retention box 39, and they are matched. If there is not, the third drive abnormality processing is executed. Here, FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the retention box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Steps S4301 to S4304>
As shown in FIG. 95, in the stay box lowering process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first acquires a combination of output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B (step S4301). Then, when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), when the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not HL (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 performs the above error processing. The third drive abnormality process that is executed is executed (step S4303). In addition, when the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), that is, when the values of the downward movement level counter are 1 to 3, the MPU 51 determines that the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LL. If not (step S4304: YES), the third drive abnormality process is executed (step S4303). That is, the MPU 51 executes the third drive abnormality processing when the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the lower movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B do not match. That is, the reason why the lower level based on the value of the lower level counter and the lower level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B do not match is that the retention box does not move, or simply matches. It is not possible to determine whether or not the retention box 39 is not moving, and when the retention box 39 is not moving, it is not possible to determine at which downward movement level the retention box 39 is stopped. Execute abnormal processing.

  It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the lower level based on the value of the lower level counter and the lower level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B are consistent is performed only before lowering the retention box 39. Alternatively, it may be performed after moving down the retention box 39, or both before and after moving down the retention box 39.

[Recovery box retention processing]
In the retention box return process of the present embodiment, a process of returning the retention box 39 to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) is performed after a certain time has elapsed since the retention box 39 was moved down to the lower limit position (downward movement level 4). To be done. Further, in the present embodiment, it is confirmed that the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the lower movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B are matched before and after the retention box 39 is returned. The third drive abnormality processing is executed when the value is not obtained. Here, FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the retention box return processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Steps S4401 to S4404>
As shown in FIG. 96, in the stay box return process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 detects the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B when the return timing of the stay box 39 is reached (Yes in steps S3601 and S3603). A combination of output levels is acquired (step S4401). Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LH (step S4402). That is, the MPU 51 immediately before returning the retention box 39 from the lower level 4 to the lower level 0, lowers the lower level based on the combination of the lower level based on the value of the lower level counter and the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B. It is judged whether it matches the motion level. Further, when the retention box 39 is returned to the downward movement level 0 (step S3604), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL (step S4403). Then, the MPU 51 performs the downward movement based on the combination of the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the output level of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at the timing of returning the retention box 39 or immediately after returning the retention box 39. If the levels do not match (No in step S4402 or S4403), the third drive abnormality process is executed (step S4304).

  It should be noted that the judgment is made as to whether the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B are matched with each other. It is not limited to both before and after, and may be performed only before or after returning the retention box 39.

  As described above, when the visibility of the special main display portion 37a is changed by the vertical movement of the retention box 39, for example, a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 occurs due to an abnormality of the motor 39a or the drive system connected to the retention box 39. Is assumed. Then, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a drive abnormality in the retention box 39 by an operation check performed after turning on the main power source of the gaming machine 10. Even if it is determined in this operation check that there is no drive abnormality, it is assumed that a drive abnormality occurs in the retention box 39 during the game.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, when the retention box 39 is moved down during the game and when the retention box 39 is returned (moved up), it is determined whether or not the retention box 39 has a drive abnormality, and there is a drive abnormality. In this case, drive abnormality processing is executed. As a result, the game can be continued even if a drive abnormality occurs in the retention box 39 during the game. In particular, since the retention box 39 is moved up and down in the jackpot game, it is significant that the game can be continued when the retention box 39 is abnormally driven.

  It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the same design change as the design change items in the above-described fifth embodiment can be made within the applicable range.

[Outline of the Invention]
The outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be additionally described below. In addition, in order to provide an understanding of the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, a description may be given with reference numerals and the like for convenience, but the invention according to the appendix is limited to a specific configuration with the reference numeral. Not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select each configuration and each processing function described below and combine them arbitrarily.

[Appendix A1]
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game set value, lottery number per unit, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc.) which is an index indicating the payout performance,
Performance information display means (37a) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412),
Performance information display control means (41) for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a),
A visibility limiting means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view;
When the specific condition is satisfied, the visual recognition restriction means (39, 39A) is controlled to visually recognize at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a). 51),
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the payout performance of the gaming machine in the game can be estimated and enjoyed based on the visible part. Further, when all the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the payout performance of the gaming machine during the game can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to estimate or grasp the payout performance of the game machine during the game, so that the game playability is improved and the motivation for continuing the game can be provided.

[Appendix A2]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination of whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed,
An advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) to shift to the special game state from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. ,
Further equipped with,
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A2, the performance information includes information on an advantage determination probability that greatly affects the payout performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, the payout performance is evaluated based on the information on the advantage determination probability, so that the payout performance can be suggested based on the index in which the payout performance of the gaming machine is more appropriately reflected. Further, by displaying a part or all of the information on the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player can enjoy the game by guessing the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability. The opportunity to judge whether to continue the game on the game machine based on the above is given.

[Appendix A3]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of gaming balls according to the winning hole type based on the winning of the gaming balls,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A1 or supplementary note A2, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A3 includes performance information indicating payout performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. Therefore, the player can display some or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can change, for example, an individual difference or a secular change at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine. It is possible to estimate or recognize the payout performance in which the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the gaming machines due to the above is reflected. As a result, the player can enjoy the winning performance based on the winning opening, and if the winning performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player can continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on the performance information. Opportunity to decide whether to do is given.

[Appendix A4]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball,
The game balls enter the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls, or until the number of game balls of the game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. Further provided is a unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations performed by the transition determination means (41) with the sphere as a trigger.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A4, the performance information includes performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determination is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is performed. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state (state with low probability mode and not time saving mode). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the number of unit determinations, and thus can know the susceptibility to the transition determination. Become. As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess the number of unit determinations and have fun, and if the number of unit determinations can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine based on the number of unit determinations. Granted.

[Appendix A5]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entering, and the transfer determining unit (41) performs the transfer determination by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, which causes a specific number of playing balls to be paid out based on the entering of the playing balls. Including,
The number of payout balls of the game ball for the entry of the game ball to the first prize hole (314) and the number of the game ball to the general prize hole (313) with respect to the number of the game balls of the game ball to the game board (31) Further provided is a payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the incoming ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A5, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total payout number of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of shot balls. That is, the payout rate is an index showing the ease of winning the prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can win the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know how easy it is to do. As a result, the player has an opportunity to infer the winning rate and enjoy it, and if the winning rate can be grasped, the player has the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on the winning rate. Granted.

[Appendix A6]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls for the entry of the game balls into the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), with respect to the entering of the game balls into the variable winning port (316) A continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a ratio of a continuous character which is a ratio of the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the continuous accessory ratio calculator (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A6, the performance information includes information on the continuous winning role ratio. Here, the ratio of consecutive winnings is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls for the entry of the game balls into the multiple winning openings, and the payout for entering the game balls into the variable winning openings. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous accessory ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio in the special gaming state), and the easiness of winning the variable winning a prize (the payout in the special gaming state). Rate). Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the continuous winning character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the continuous winning character ratio, so that the result of the shift determination shifts to the special game. It is possible to know the frequency (the stay ratio in the special gaming state) and the ease of winning the variable winning port. Thereby, the player can enjoy by guessing the continuous character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine in play based on the continuous character ratio. The opportunity to do is given.

[Appendix A7]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are played by the support of an electric accessory, and a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball. The ball can be entered, and the entry of the game ball in the special game state and the second winning opening (315) that gives the opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball Including possible variable winning a prize mouth (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the input of the game balls into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), with respect to the entering of the game balls into the variable winning opening (316) A character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a character ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of paid-out balls and the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-out balls of the game ball into the second winning opening (315). ,
Further equipped with,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the character ratio calculated by the character ratio calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A7, the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total payout number, which is the total number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the entry of the game ball to the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. It is the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the entered balls. That is, the accessory ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is such that the game is transferred to the special game (the stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (time saving game state) receiving the support of the electric accessory, and This is an index showing the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball-out rate in the special gaming state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the character ratio, and thus the frequency at which the result of the transfer determination is to transfer to the special game ( Stay ratio in special gaming state), stay ratio in support gaming state (time saving gaming state) that receives support for electric accessory, and easiness of winning in variable winning a prize port and second winning a prize port (exit in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess the character ratio and enjoy it, and if the character ratio can be grasped, an opportunity to judge whether to continue the game on the gaming machine based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Appendix A8]
The visual recognition restriction means (39) displays the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) on a first position (upper limit position) where the performance information is invisible or difficult to visually recognize and on the performance information display means (37a). Is movable to a second position (lower limit position) where the entire performance information is visually recognized,
The visual recognition state control means (51) moves the visual recognition restriction means (39) in a predetermined direction (downward) from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A7.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A8, a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of moving the visibility restriction means in a predetermined direction.

[Appendix A9]
The visual recognition limiting means (39) is moved from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times,
The visual recognition state control means (51) includes the visual recognition limiting means (39) each time the specific condition is satisfied until the visual recognition limiting means (39) is moved from the first position to the second position. ) Is gradually moved in the predetermined direction, the gaming machine described in Appendix A8.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A9, since the visibility limiting means is moved stepwise in the predetermined direction every time the specific condition is satisfied, the viewable area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually expanded. It As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually clarified, so that the performance information can be guessed and enjoyed until the performance information can be grasped. As a result, the motivation for continuing the game can be improved until the performance information can be grasped, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A10]
The visual recognition state control means (51) sets the visual recognition restriction means (39) at at least one intermediate position set between the first position and the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. Can be stopped,
At the intermediate position, a part of the performance information is visible, and two or more of a plurality of contents (for example, game setting values 1 to 6) set as the performance information of the same type (for example, game setting value) The game machine according to Supplementary Note A9, wherein the contents (for example, game setting values 2, 3, 5, and 6) are set at a position where it is impossible or difficult to distinguish (for example, an intermediate position of the lower movement level 1).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A10, when the visibility limiting means is moved in a predetermined direction when a specific condition is satisfied, a part of the performance information becomes visible, but it is impossible or difficult to distinguish two or more contents. Is. Therefore, it becomes possible to narrow down and estimate from a plurality of contents to a smaller number before the contents of the performance information can be recognized by satisfying a specific condition. As a result, the player can guess the performance information stepwise by satisfying the specific condition a plurality of times and improve the accuracy of the prediction stepwise. You can enjoy the process of.

[Appendix A11]
The game according to Supplementary Note A8, wherein the visual recognition state control means (51) moves the visual recognition restriction means (39) from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A11, the visibility limiting means is moved from the first position where the performance information is invisible or difficult to view to the second position where the entire performance information is visible when a specific condition is satisfied. . Therefore, since the game property that the performance information is immediately visible when the specific condition is satisfied is provided, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A12]
The visual recognition state control means (51) moves the visual recognition limiting means (39) to the first position after a lapse of a predetermined time after the visual recognition limiting means (39) starts moving from the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A8 to A11.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A12, the visibility limiting means returns to the first position where the performance information cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to visually recognize after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement was started from the first position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility restriction means from being present at a position where part or all of the performance information can be viewed for a long time, and thus to prevent the performance information from being left for a long time in a state where the performance information can be estimated or grasped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance information from being guessed or grasped by the player who is not playing the game.

[Appendix A13]
A game board (31) in which a game area in which a game ball flows down is set,
A plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), which are provided in the game area and in which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls,
A discharge port (318) for discharging the game balls that have not been inserted into the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board,
A special discharge opening (363) provided above the game area with respect to at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for discharging the game balls to the back side of the game board. ,
Further equipped with,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A12, wherein the specific condition is that a gaming ball is inserted into the special discharge port (363).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A13, the visibility limiting means is moved in a predetermined direction by inserting the game ball into the special discharge port, and the viewable area of the performance information is expanded. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game is improved because it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention not only to the result of the transition determination by the transition determining means but also to whether or not the game ball enters the special discharge port.

[Appendix A14]
The visual recognition limiting means (39) is capable of accommodating the game ball entered in the special discharge port (363), and is accommodated when the visual recognition state control means (51) moves the gaming ball to the second position. The gaming machine according to Appendix A13, wherein the gaming ball can be discharged.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A14, the game balls of the visibility limiting means are discharged when the visibility limiting means is moved to the second position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls of the visibility limiting means from overflowing.

[Appendix A15]
The at least one winning opening (313 to 316) includes a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game,
A distribution device for distributing game balls to either the normal ball entrance (387) for guiding the game ball that has entered the variable winning port (316) to a position where the game ball can enter or the special discharge port (363). (36) is further provided, the gaming machine according to supplementary note A13 or supplementary note A14.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A15, in a special game in which a game ball can enter the variable winning port, the game ball is distributed to the normal ball inlet and the special outlet by the distribution device. That is, at least in the special game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special discharge port that changes the visual recognition state of the performance information. Therefore, an opportunity to infer or grasp the performance information is given in the special game, so that the enjoyment of inferring or grasping the performance information can be given to the special game in which the game tends to be progressed inorganically.

[Appendix A16]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball,
The first prize hole (314) is capable of entering a game ball hit in the left side area of the game board (31),
The variable winning port (316) can enter a game ball launched in the right side area of the game board (31),
The distribution device (36) distributes the game ball shot in the right area to either the normal ball entrance (387) or the special discharge port (363). Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A16, since the gaming ball launched in the left side area of the gaming board can enter the first winning hole, it is necessary to perform so-called left hitting in order to receive the transition determination to the special game. There is. On the other hand, since a game ball shot in the right area of the game board can enter the variable winning port, it is necessary to hit the right side in the special game. Then, the distribution device provided with the special discharge port in which the change in the visual recognition state of the performance information due to the entry of the game ball can be expected can distribute the game ball hit in the right side area of the game board to the special discharge port. Therefore, the visual recognition state of the performance information does not change in the game for receiving the transition determination to the special game, and the visual recognition state of the performance information may change in the special game. In this way, the visual recognition state of the performance information may change at the time of right-handing such as a special game, so that the player who is interested in estimating or grasping the performance information transfers the result of the transition determination to the special game. It is possible to give motivation to continue the game until it becomes a thing.

[Appendix A17]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A13 to A16, wherein the special discharge opening (363) is more difficult to enter than the normal entrance opening (387).

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A17, wherein the special outlet (363) is provided above the normal ball inlet (387).

[Appendix A19]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A17 or supplementary note A18, in which the opening area of the special discharge opening (363) is smaller than that of the normal entrance opening (387).

[Appendix A20]
The game according to any one of appendices A17 to A19, wherein the sorting device (36) has an inhibiting means (365) that inhibits entry of a game ball into the special outlet (363). Machine.

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A20, wherein the inhibiting means (365) is a wall portion surrounding the special discharge port (363).

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes A17 to A21, it is more difficult to enter the game ball into the special outlet than the normal inlet, so that it is not easy to grasp the performance information. Therefore, when the payout performance is low, for example, when the advantage determination probability is low, the player can easily understand that the advantage determination probability is low, so that the game on the gaming machine 10 can be stopped early. Can be suppressed.

[Appendix A22]
The visual recognition restriction means (39A) changes the visual recognition state of the performance information on the performance information display means (37a) under the control of the visual recognition state control means (51). The gaming machine described in any one.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A22, the visual recognition state of the performance information display means is changed by controlling the visual recognition restriction means by the visual recognition state control means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display unit can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the visual recognition state of the performance information.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A22, wherein the visibility limiting means (39A) is a translucent display device capable of changing the light-shielding property under the control of the viewing state control means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display unit is changed by changing the light-shielding property of the translucent display device. For example, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is improved by reducing the light-shielding property of part or all of the translucent display device. Therefore, by a simple method of changing the light-shielding property of the translucent display device, it is possible to realize a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible.

[Appendix A24]
The visual recognition state control means (51),
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is changed from the first state (visible level 0) where the performance information is invisible or difficult to visually recognize to the performance information display means ( 37a) changes the visual recognition state of the performance information to a second state (visual confirmation level 4) in which the entire performance information displayed can be visually confirmed,
From the first state to the second state of the visibility limiting means (39), the visible region of the translucent display device (39A) is stepwise changed every time the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix A23, which is enlarged to

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A24, the transparent area in the translucent display device is expanded stepwise every time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually increased. Expanded. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means gradually becomes clear, and the performance information can be guessed and enjoyed in the process. As a result, the motivation for continuing the game can be improved until the performance information can be confirmed, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A25]
The translucent display device (39A) has a plurality of regions that allow a part of the performance information to be visually recognized in a predetermined order,
The visual recognition state control means (51) makes a part of the performance information visible in one or more areas of the plurality of areas each time the specific condition is satisfied. Gaming machine described in.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A25, wherein the plurality of regions are discretely arranged in the translucent display device (39A).

[Appendix A27]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light-emissible regions,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A25 or supplementary note A26, characterized in that the plurality of regions are provided corresponding to the plurality of light-emissible regions.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A25 to supplementary note A27, performance is made visible in the translucent display device in part of one or more regions of the plurality of regions every time a specific condition is satisfied. The performance information displayed on the information display means becomes gradually visible. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually clarified, so that the performance information can be guessed and enjoyed until the performance information can be grasped. As a result, the motivation for continuing the game can be improved until the performance information can be confirmed, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A28]
The visual recognition state control means (51) cannot visually recognize the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) of the translucent display device (39A) when the specific condition is satisfied, or It is characterized in that the first state (visual recognition level 0) that is difficult to visually recognize is changed to a second state (visual recognition level 4) in which the entire performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is visible. The gaming machine described in Appendix A22.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A28, the translucent display device is changed from a light-shielding state in which the performance information is invisible or difficult to be visible to a transparent state in which the entire performance information is visible when a specific condition is satisfied. . Therefore, since the game property that the performance information is immediately visible when the specific condition is satisfied is provided, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A29]
The visual recognition state control means (51) moves the visual recognition limiting means (39) to the first position after a lapse of a predetermined time after the visual recognition limiting means (39) starts moving from the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A22 to A28.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A29, the visual recognition limiting means returns to the first position where the performance information cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to visually recognize after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement was started from the first position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility restriction means from being present at a position where part or all of the performance information can be viewed for a long time, and thus to prevent the performance information from being left for a long time in a state where the performance information can be estimated or grasped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance information from being guessed or grasped by the player who is not playing the game.

[Appendix A30]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light-emissible regions,
Note that the specific performance information is displayed on the performance information display means (37a) by the emission color or blinking pattern of the plurality of light-emissible regions when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of A29.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A30, the specific performance information can be easily specified by the emission color or blinking pattern of the light-emissible area of the performance information display means.

[Appendix A31]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The specific conditions are
The number of times the transfer determination is performed by the transfer determination means (41) reaches a predetermined number,
The result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special gaming state continuously for a predetermined number of times,
The result of the transition determination that the transition to the special gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times,
The total number of game balls shot in the game area of the game board (31) reaches a certain number, or the total number of game balls shot in the game area of the game board (31) and the plurality of winning holes. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A30, characterized in that the number of balls from the total number of coins to be paid out by entering the game balls into (313 to 316) exceeds a predetermined number.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A31, the performance information is displayed on the performance information display means when the specific condition is satisfied, so that the player may expect the timing at which the performance information is displayed on the performance information display means. It will be possible. As a result, the player can anticipate the timing at which the performance information is displayed and look forward to the arrival of the timing to proceed with the game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B1]
A game board (31) in which a game area in which a game ball flows down is set,
A plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), which are provided in the game area and in which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls,
A discharge port (318) for discharging the game balls that have not been inserted into the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board,
A special discharge port (363) which is provided above the game area with respect to at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) and discharges the game ball to the back side of the game board.
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game set value, lottery number per unit, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc.) which is an index indicating the payout performance,
Performance information display means (37a) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412),
Performance information display control means (41) for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a),
A visibility limiting means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view;
Based on the entry of the game ball into the special discharge port (363), the visibility restriction means (39, 39A) is controlled to display at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a). A visual recognition state control means (51) that enables visual recognition;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the performance information can be estimated based on the visible part and can be enjoyed. Further, when all the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the performance information can be grasped. Therefore, the game playability is improved by being able to guess or grasp the performance information, and it is possible to give motivation to continue playing the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note B1, at least a part of the performance information can be visually recognized by inserting the gaming ball into the special discharge port. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether the game ball is inserted into the special discharge port, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B2]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination of whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed,
An advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) to shift to the special game state from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. ,
Further equipped with,
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B2, the performance information includes information on an advantage determination probability that greatly affects the payout performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, the payout performance is evaluated based on the information on the advantage determination probability, so that the payout performance can be suggested based on the index in which the payout performance of the gaming machine is more appropriately reflected. Further, by displaying a part or all of the information on the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player can enjoy the game by guessing the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability. The opportunity to judge whether to continue the game on the game machine based on the above is given.

[Appendix B3]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of gaming balls according to the winning hole type based on the winning of the gaming balls,
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1 or Appendix B2, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B3, performance information indicating payout performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings is included. Therefore, the player can display some or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can change, for example, an individual difference or a secular change at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine. It is possible to estimate or recognize the payout performance in which the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the gaming machines due to the above is reflected. As a result, the player can enjoy the winning performance based on the winning opening, and if the winning performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player can continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on the performance information. Opportunity to decide whether to do is given.

[Appendix B4]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball,
The game balls enter the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls, or until the number of game balls of the game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. Further provided is a unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations performed by the transition determination means (41) with the sphere as a trigger.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B4, the performance information includes performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determination is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is performed. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state (state in which the low probability mode is not in the high frequency support mode). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the number of unit determinations, and thus can know the susceptibility to the transition determination. Become. As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess the number of unit determinations and have fun, and if the number of unit determinations can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine based on the number of unit determinations. Granted.

[Appendix B5]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entering, and the transfer determining unit (41) performs the transfer determination by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, which causes a specific number of playing balls to be paid out based on the entering of the playing balls. Including,
The number of payout balls of the game ball for the entry of the game ball to the first prize hole (314) and the number of the game ball to the general prize hole (313) with respect to the number of the game balls of the game ball to the game board (31) Further provided is a payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the incoming ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information on the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B5, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total payout number of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of shot balls. That is, the payout rate is an index showing the ease of winning the prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can win the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know how easy it is to do. As a result, the player has an opportunity to infer the winning rate and enjoy it, and if the winning rate can be grasped, the player has the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on the winning rate. Granted.

[Appendix B6]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls for the entry of the game balls into the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), with respect to the entering of the game balls into the variable winning port (316) A continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a ratio of a continuous character which is a ratio of the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information about the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the continuous accessory ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B6, the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio. Here, the ratio of consecutive winnings is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls for the entry of the game balls into the multiple winning openings, and the payout for entering the game balls into the variable winning openings. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous accessory ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio in the special gaming state), and the easiness of winning the variable winning a prize (the payout in the special gaming state). Rate). Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the continuous winning character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the continuous winning character ratio, so that the result of the shift determination shifts to the special game. It is possible to know the frequency (the stay ratio in the special gaming state) and the ease of winning the variable winning port. Thereby, the player can enjoy by guessing the continuous character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine in play based on the continuous character ratio. The opportunity to do is given.

[Appendix B7]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are played by the support of an electric accessory, and a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball. The ball can be entered, and the entry of the game ball in the special game state and the second winning opening (315) that gives the opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball Including possible variable winning a prize mouth (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the input of the game balls into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), with respect to the entering of the game balls into the variable winning opening (316) A character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a character ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of paid-out balls and the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-out balls of the game ball into the second winning opening (315). ,
Further equipped with,
The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information on the character ratio calculated by the character ratio calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B7, the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total payout number, which is the total number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the entry of the game ball to the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. It is the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the entered balls. That is, the accessory ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is such that the game is transferred to the special game (the stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (time saving game state) receiving the support of the electric accessory, and This is an index showing the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball-out rate in the special gaming state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the character ratio, and thus the frequency at which the result of the transfer determination is to transfer to the special game ( Stay ratio in special gaming state), stay ratio in support gaming state (time saving gaming state) that receives support for electric accessory, and easiness of winning in variable winning a prize port and second winning a prize port (exit in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess the character ratio and enjoy it, and if the character ratio can be grasped, an opportunity to judge whether to continue the game on the gaming machine based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Appendix B8]
The at least one winning opening (313 to 316) includes a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game,
A distribution device (36) for distributing the game balls to either the normal ball entrance (387) for guiding the game ball to a position where the game ball can enter the variable winning opening (316) or the special discharge opening (363). The gaming machine according to supplementary notes B1 to B7, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B8, in a special game in which a game ball can enter the variable winning port, the game ball is distributed to the normal ball inlet and the special outlet by the distribution device. That is, at least in the special game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special discharge port that changes the visual recognition state of the performance information. Therefore, an opportunity to infer or grasp the performance information is given in the special game, so that the enjoyment of inferring or grasping the performance information can be given to the special game in which the game tends to be progressed inorganically.

[Appendix B9]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball,
The first prize hole (314) is capable of entering a game ball hit in the left side area of the game board (31),
The variable winning port (316) can enter a game ball launched in the right side area of the game board (31),
The distribution device (36) distributes the game ball shot in the right side area to either the normal ball entrance (387) or the special discharge port (363). Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix B9, the gaming balls that have been launched in the left side area of the gaming board can enter the first winning port, so it is necessary to perform so-called left-handed striking in order to receive the transition determination to the special game. There is. On the other hand, since a game ball shot in the right area of the game board can enter the variable winning port, it is necessary to hit the right side in the special game. Then, the distribution device provided with the special discharge port in which the change in the visual recognition state of the performance information due to the entry of the game ball can be expected can distribute the game ball hit in the right side area of the game board to the special discharge port. Therefore, the visual recognition state of the performance information does not change in the game for receiving the transition determination to the special game, and the visual recognition state of the performance information may change in the special game. In this way, the visual recognition state of the performance information may change at the time of right-handing such as a special game, so that the player who is interested in estimating or grasping the performance information transfers the result of the transition determination to the special game. It is possible to give motivation to continue the game until it becomes a thing.

[Appendix B10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B8 or Appendix B9, wherein the special discharge opening (363) is more difficult to enter than the normal entrance (387).

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B10, wherein the special outlet (363) is provided above the normal ball inlet (387).

[Appendix B12]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note B10 or supplementary note B11, wherein the special outlet (363) has an opening area smaller than that of the normal entrance (387).

[Appendix B13]
The game according to any one of supplementary notes B10 to B12, wherein the sorting device (36) has an inhibiting means (365) that inhibits entry of a game ball into the special outlet (363). Machine.

[Appendix B14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B13, wherein the inhibiting means (365) is a wall portion surrounding the special discharge port (363).

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes B10 to B14, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the special discharge port as compared with the normal inlet port, so that it is not easy to grasp the performance information. Therefore, for example, when the advantage determination probability is low, the player can easily understand that the advantage determination probability is low, and thus it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine 10 from being stopped early.

[Appendix C1]
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game set value, lottery number per unit, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc.) which is an index indicating the payout performance,
Performance information display means (37a) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412),
Performance information display control means (41) for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a),
A visibility limiting means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view;
When the specific condition is satisfied, the visual recognition restriction means (39, 39A) is controlled to visually recognize at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a). 51),
Equipped with
The visual recognition limiting means (39A) changes the visual recognition state of the performance information on the performance information display means (37a) under the control of the visual recognition state control means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the payout performance of the gaming machine in the game can be estimated and enjoyed based on the visible part. Further, when all the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the payout performance of the gaming machine during the game can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to estimate or grasp the payout performance of the game machine during the game, so that the game playability is improved and the motivation for continuing the game can be provided.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C1, the visual recognition state of the performance information display means is changed by controlling the visual recognition restriction means by the visual recognition state control means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display unit can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the visual recognition state of the performance information.

[Appendix C2]
The visual recognition state control means (51),
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is changed from the first state (visible level 0) where the performance information is invisible or difficult to visually recognize to the performance information display means ( 37a) changes the visual recognition state of the performance information to a second state (visual confirmation level 4) in which the entire performance information displayed can be visually confirmed,
From the first state to the second state of the visibility limiting means (39), the visible region of the translucent display device (39A) is stepwise changed every time the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the gaming machine is enlarged.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C2, the transparent area in the translucent display device is gradually expanded every time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually increased. Expanded. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means gradually becomes clear, and the performance information can be guessed and enjoyed in the process. As a result, the motivation for continuing the game can be improved until the performance information can be confirmed, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note C1 or supplementary note C2, wherein the visibility limiting means (39A) is a translucent display device capable of changing the light-shielding property under the control of the visual recognition state control means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display unit is changed by changing the light-shielding property of the translucent display device. For example, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is improved by reducing the light-shielding property of part or all of the translucent display device. Therefore, by a simple method of changing the light-shielding property of the translucent display device, it is possible to realize a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible.

[Appendix C4]
The translucent display device (39A) has a plurality of regions that allow a part of the performance information to be visually recognized in a predetermined order,
The visual recognition state control means (51) makes visible a part of the performance information in one or more areas of the plurality of areas every time the specific condition is satisfied. Gaming machine described in.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C4, wherein the plurality of regions are arranged discretely in the translucent display device (39A).

[Appendix C6]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light-emissible regions,
The gaming machine according to Appendix C4 or Appendix C5, wherein the plurality of regions are provided corresponding to the plurality of light-emissible regions.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C4 to supplementary note C6, since performance information is partially visible in one or more regions of the plurality of regions on the translucent display device every time a specific condition is satisfied, The performance information displayed on the information display means becomes gradually visible. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually clarified, so that the performance information can be guessed and enjoyed until the performance information can be grasped. As a result, the motivation for continuing the game can be improved until the performance information can be confirmed, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The visual recognition state control means (51) cannot visually recognize the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) of the translucent display device (39A) when the specific condition is satisfied, or It is characterized in that the first state (visual recognition level 0) that is difficult to visually recognize is changed to a second state (visual recognition level 4) in which the entire performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is visible. The gaming machine described in Appendix C1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C7, when the specific condition is satisfied, the translucent display device is changed from the light-shielding state in which the performance information is invisible or difficult to be visible to the transparent state in which the entire performance information is visible. . Therefore, since the game property that the performance information is immediately visible when the specific condition is satisfied is provided, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C8]
The visual recognition state control means (51) moves the visual recognition limiting means (39) to the first position after a lapse of a predetermined time after the visual recognition limiting means (39) starts moving from the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes C1 to C7.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C8, the visual recognition limiting means returns to the first position where the performance information cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to visually recognize after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement was started from the first position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility restriction means from being present at a position where part or all of the performance information can be viewed for a long time, and thus to prevent the performance information from being left for a long time in a state where the performance information can be estimated or grasped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance information from being guessed or grasped by the player who is not playing the game.

[Appendix C9]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light-emissible regions,
The additional information C1 is characterized in that the specific performance information is displayed on the performance information display means (37a) according to the emission color or blinking pattern of the plurality of light-emissible regions when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of C8.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C9, the specific performance information can be easily specified by the emission color or blinking pattern of the light-emissible area of the performance information display means.

[Appendix C10]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination of whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed,
An advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) to shift to the special game state from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. ,
Further equipped with,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C9, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C10, the performance information includes information on an advantage determination probability that greatly affects the payout performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, the payout performance is evaluated based on the information on the advantage determination probability, so that the payout performance can be suggested based on the index in which the payout performance of the gaming machine is more appropriately reflected. Further, by displaying a part or all of the information on the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player can enjoy the game by guessing the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability. The opportunity to judge whether to continue the game on the game machine based on the above is given.

[Appendix C11]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of gaming balls according to the winning hole type based on the winning of the gaming balls,
The game according to any one of Appendix C1 to Appendix C10, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316). Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C11, performance information indicating the payout performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings is included. Therefore, the player can display some or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can change, for example, an individual difference or a secular change at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine. It is possible to estimate or recognize the payout performance in which the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the gaming machines due to the above is reflected. As a result, the player can enjoy the winning performance based on the winning opening, and if the winning performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player can continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on the performance information. Opportunity to decide whether to do is given.

[Appendix C12]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball,
The game balls enter the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls, or until the number of game balls of the game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. Further provided is a unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations performed by the transition determination means (41) with the sphere as a trigger.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C12, the performance information includes performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determination is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is performed. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state (state with low probability mode and not time saving mode). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the number of unit determinations, and thus can know the susceptibility to the transition determination. Become. As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess the number of unit determinations and have fun, and if the number of unit determinations can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine based on the number of unit determinations. Granted.

[Appendix C13]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entering, and the transfer determining unit (41) performs the transfer determination by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, which causes a specific number of playing balls to be paid out based on the entering of the playing balls. Including,
The number of payout balls of the game ball for the entry of the game ball to the first prize hole (314) and the number of the game ball to the general prize hole (313) with respect to the number of the game balls of the game ball to the game board (31) Further provided is a payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the incoming ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information on the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C13, the performance information includes information regarding the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total payout number of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of shot balls. That is, the payout rate is an index showing the ease of winning the prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can win the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know how easy it is to do. As a result, the player has an opportunity to infer the winning rate and enjoy it, and if the winning rate can be grasped, the player has the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on the winning rate. Granted.

[Appendix C14]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls for the entry of the game balls into the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), with respect to the entering of the game balls into the variable winning port (316) A continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a ratio of a continuous character which is a ratio of the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the continuous accessory ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C14, the performance information includes information on the continuous winning role ratio. Here, the ratio of consecutive winnings is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls for the entry of the game balls into the multiple winning openings, and the payout for entering the game balls into the variable winning openings. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous accessory ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio in the special gaming state), and the easiness of winning the variable winning a prize (the payout in the special gaming state). Rate). Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the continuous winning character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the continuous winning character ratio, so that the result of the shift determination shifts to the special game. It is possible to know the frequency (the stay ratio in the special gaming state) and the ease of winning the variable winning port. Thereby, the player can enjoy by guessing the continuous character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine in play based on the continuous character ratio. The opportunity to do is given.

[Appendix C15]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are played by the support of an electric accessory, and a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball. The ball can be entered, and the entry of the game ball in the special game state and the second winning opening (315) that gives the opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball Including possible variable winning a prize mouth (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the input of the game balls into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), with respect to the entering of the game balls into the variable winning opening (316) A character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a character ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of paid-out balls and the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-out balls of the game ball into the second winning opening (315). ,
Further equipped with,
The gaming machine according to Appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information on the character ratio calculated by the character ratio calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C15, the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total payout number, which is the total number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the entry of the game ball to the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. It is the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the entered balls. That is, the accessory ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is such that the game is transferred to the special game (the stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (time saving game state) receiving the support of the electric accessory, and This is an index showing the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball-out rate in the special gaming state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the character ratio, and thus the frequency at which the result of the transfer determination is to transfer to the special game ( Stay ratio in special gaming state), stay ratio in support gaming state (time saving gaming state) that receives support for electric accessory, and easiness of winning in variable winning a prize port and second winning a prize port (exit in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess the character ratio and enjoy it, and if the character ratio can be grasped, an opportunity to judge whether to continue the game on the gaming machine based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Appendix D1]
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game set value, lottery number per unit, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc.) which is an index indicating the payout performance,
Performance information display means (37a) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412),
Performance information display control means (41) for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a),
A visibility limiting means (39) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view.
A visual recognition state control means (51) that controls the visual recognition restriction means (39) when a specific condition is satisfied and makes at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible. When,
An abnormality determining means (51) for determining whether the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is the visual recognition state of the desired performance information;
A gaming machine comprising:

[Appendix D2]
When the abnormality determination means (51) determines that an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition state of the performance information, a response processing execution means (51) is further provided for executing a response processing for the abnormality. The gaming machine described in Appendix D2.

  With the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D1 and Supplementary Note D2, it is possible to determine whether or not the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is the visual recognition state of the desired performance information. This makes it possible to deal with the case where the visual recognition state of the performance information is different from the intended one.

[Appendix D3]
The visibility restricting means (39A) has a changeable visibility under the control of the visibility controlling means (51), and a forced visibility restricting means (39A) different from the visibility restricting means (39),
A forced visual recognition state control means (51) for controlling the visibility of the forced visual recognition limiting means (39A),
Further equipped with,
The visual recognition restriction means (39) displays the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) on a first position (upper limit position) where the performance information is invisible or difficult to visually recognize and on the performance information display means (37a). Is movable to a second position (lower limit position) where the entire performance information is visually recognized,
The abnormality determining means (51) can determine that the visual recognition limiting means (39) cannot move to the second position,
The response process execution means (51) is configured to display the performance information display means (37a) when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual recognition restriction means (39) cannot move to the second position. The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein the forced visual recognition limiting means (39A) is controlled so that the performance information becomes invisible or difficult.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D3, the performance of the performance information display means by the forced visual recognition restriction means when the visual recognition restriction means cannot move to the second position where the performance information is invisible or difficult on the performance information display means The information may be invisible or difficult. As a result, it is possible to prevent the state where a part or all of the performance information on the performance information display means is visible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a part or all of the performance information on the performance information display means from being visible even if the specific condition is not satisfied, and the player from guessing or recognizing the performance information.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine described in appendix D3, wherein the forced visual recognition limiting means (39A) is capable of changing the visible light transmittance under the control of the forced visual recognition state control means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D4, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the forced visual recognition state control means. With this, it is possible to prevent a state in which a part or all of the performance information on the performance information display unit is visible with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D3, wherein the forced visual confirmation limiting means (39A) is movable to a position covering the performance information display means (37a) under the control of the forced visual recognition state control means (51). .

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D5, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by moving the performance information display means to a position covered by the forced visual recognition state control means. With this, it is possible to prevent a state in which a part or all of the performance information on the performance information display unit is visible with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D6]
The forced visual recognition limiting means (39A) is a light source controlled by the forced visual recognition state control means (51), and an optical member into which light emitted from the light source is incident and which can diffuse or guide the incident light. , A gaming machine described in Appendix D3.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D6, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by turning on or off the light source. With this, it is possible to prevent a state in which a part or all of the performance information on the performance information display unit is visible with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D7]
The forced visual confirmation state control means (51), if the abnormality determination means (51) determines that an abnormality occurs in the visual recognition state of the performance information, the forced visual confirmation state control means (51) performs the forced visual confirmation if the specific condition is satisfied. The visibility limiting means (39A) is controlled to make at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible, and any one of supplementary notes D3 to D6 is provided. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D7, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be viewed by controlling the forced view restriction means when an abnormality occurs in the visible state of the performance information. It is said that That is, when a drive abnormality or the like of the visual recognition limiting means occurs, the visibility of the performance information is changed by the forced visual recognition limiting means instead of the visual recognition limiting means. Thus, even when the visibility of the performance information cannot be changed by the visibility limiting unit, the visibility of the performance information can be changed by the forced visibility limiting unit.

[Appendix D8]
The visual recognition restriction means (39) displays the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) on a first position (upper limit position) where the performance information is invisible or difficult to visually recognize and on the performance information display means (37a). Is movable to a second position (lower limit position) where the entire performance information is visually recognized,
The performance information display means (37a) is movable to a position hidden by the visibility restriction means (39) at least when the visibility restriction means (39) is at the second position,
The abnormality determining means (51) can determine that the visual recognition limiting means (39) cannot move to the second position,
The response process execution means (51) is configured to display the performance information display means (37a) when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual recognition restriction means (39) cannot move to the second position. The gaming machine described in Appendix D3, wherein the gaming machine is moved to a position hidden by the visual recognition limiting means (39).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D8, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by moving the performance information display means. With this, it is possible to prevent a state in which a part or all of the performance information on the performance information display unit is visible with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D9]
The abnormality determining means (51) includes a detecting means (40A) capable of detecting that the visual recognition limiting means (39A) is in the second position,
The abnormality determining means (51) is controlled by the detection means (40A) when the visual recognition control means (51) controls the visual control means (39) to move to the second position. In any one of appendixes D3 to D8, characterized in that when it is not detected that (39A) is in the second position, the visual recognition limiting means (39) is determined to be immovable to the second position. The game machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D9, it is possible to determine by the detection means whether or not the visual recognition limiting means cannot move to the second position. Accordingly, it is possible to detect whether or not there is an abnormality in the visual recognition limiting means with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D10]
The abnormality determining means (51) determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means (39) from the time the main power source of the gaming machine is turned on until the game can be started. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D9.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D10, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means from the time the main power source of the gaming machine is turned on until the game can be started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from starting in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the visual recognition limiting means, it is possible to deal with the abnormality.

[Appendix D11]
In any one of Appendix D1 to Appendix D10, the abnormality determining means (51) determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means (39) after the game can be started. The game machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D11, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means after the game is started. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the visual-recognition limiting means after the start of the game is enabled, the abnormality in the visual-recognition limiting means can be found and the abnormality can be dealt with.

[Appendix D12]
An abnormality occurs when the abnormality determining means (51) determines that the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the desired visual recognition state of the performance information. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D11, further comprising notifying means (341, 26) for notifying that the game is being performed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D12, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred when the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the intended state. As a result, the game hall side can know that an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means, and it is possible to deal with the abnormality.

[Appendix D13]
Execution of a game when the abnormality determining means (51) determines that the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the visual recognition state of the desired performance information. 13. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D12, further comprising selection means (341, 20) capable of selecting whether or not to enable.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D13, it is possible to select whether or not the game can be executed when the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the intended state. With this, when there is no abnormality other than the visual-recognition limiting means and there is no problem in executing the game, it is possible to entrust the game hall side with the determination as to whether or not the player should use the game machine.

[Appendix D14]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination of whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed,
An advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) to shift to the special game state from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. ,
Further equipped with,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note D1 to supplementary note D13, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantageous determination probability set by the advantageous determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D14, the performance information includes information on an advantage determination probability that greatly affects the payout performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, the payout performance is evaluated based on the information on the advantage determination probability, so that the payout performance can be suggested based on the index in which the payout performance of the gaming machine is more appropriately reflected. Further, by displaying a part or all of the information on the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player can enjoy the game by guessing the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability. The opportunity to judge whether to continue the game on the game machine based on the above is given.

[Appendix D15]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of gaming balls according to the winning hole type based on the winning of the gaming balls,
The game according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D14, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning prize openings (313 to 316). Machine.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D15 includes performance information indicating payout performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. Therefore, the player can display some or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can change, for example, an individual difference or a secular change at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine. It is possible to estimate or recognize the payout performance in which the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the gaming machines due to the above is reflected. As a result, the player can enjoy the winning performance based on the winning opening, and if the winning performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player can continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on the performance information. Opportunity to decide whether to do is given.

[Appendix D16]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball,
The game balls enter the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls, or until the number of game balls of the game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. Further provided is a unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations performed by the transition determination means (41) with the sphere as a trigger.
The gaming machine according to appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information on the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D16, the performance information includes performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determination is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is performed. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state (state with low probability mode and not time saving mode). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the number of unit determinations, and thus can know the susceptibility to the transition determination. Become. As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess the number of unit determinations and have fun, and if the number of unit determinations can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine based on the number of unit determinations. Granted.

[Appendix D17]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entering, and the transfer determining unit (41) performs the transfer determination by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, which causes a specific number of playing balls to be paid out based on the entering of the playing balls. Including,
The number of payout balls of the game ball for the entry of the game ball to the first prize hole (314) and the number of the game ball to the general prize hole (313) with respect to the number of the game balls of the game ball to the game board (31) Further provided is a payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the incoming ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D17, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total payout number of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of shot balls. That is, the payout rate is an index showing the ease of winning the prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can win the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know how easy it is to do. As a result, the player has an opportunity to infer the winning rate and enjoy it, and if the winning rate can be grasped, the player has the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on the winning rate. Granted.

[Appendix D18]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls for the entry of the game balls into the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), with respect to the entering of the game balls into the variable winning port (316) A continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a ratio of a continuous character which is a ratio of the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to Appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the continuous accessory ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D18, the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio. Here, the ratio of consecutive winnings is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls for the entry of the game balls into the multiple winning openings, and the payout for entering the game balls into the variable winning openings. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous accessory ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio in the special gaming state), and the easiness of winning the variable winning a prize (the payout in the special gaming state). Rate). Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the continuous winning character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the continuous winning character ratio, so that the result of the shift determination shifts to the special game. It is possible to know the frequency (the stay ratio in the special gaming state) and the ease of winning the variable winning port. Thereby, the player can enjoy by guessing the continuous character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine in play based on the continuous character ratio. The opportunity to do is given.

[Appendix D19]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are played by the support of an electric accessory, and a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball. The ball can be entered, and the entry of the game ball in the special game state and the second winning opening (315) that gives the opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball Including possible variable winning a prize mouth (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the input of the game balls into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), with respect to the entering of the game balls into the variable winning opening (316) A character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a character ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of paid-out balls and the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-out balls of the game ball into the second winning opening (315). ,
Further equipped with,
The gaming machine according to Appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information on the character ratio calculated by the character ratio calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D19, the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total payout number, which is the total number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the entry of the game ball to the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. It is the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the entered balls. That is, the accessory ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is such that the game is transferred to the special game (the stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (time saving game state) receiving the support of the electric accessory, and This is an index showing the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball-out rate in the special gaming state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the character ratio, and thus the frequency at which the result of the transfer determination is to transfer to the special game ( Stay ratio in special gaming state), stay ratio in support gaming state (time saving gaming state) that receives support for electric accessory, and easiness of winning in variable winning a prize port and second winning a prize port (exit in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess the character ratio and enjoy it, and if the character ratio can be grasped, an opportunity to judge whether to continue the game on the gaming machine based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Appendix E1]
A game board (31) in which a game area in which a game ball flows down is set,
A plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), which are provided in the game area and in which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls,
A discharge port (318) for discharging the game balls that have not been inserted into the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board,
A special discharge opening (363) provided above the game area with respect to at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for discharging the game balls to the back side of the game board. ,
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game set value, lottery number per unit, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc.) which is an index indicating the payout performance,
Performance information display means (37a) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412),
Performance information display control means (41) for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a),
A visual limitation means (39) that makes the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see, and is capable of accommodating a game ball that has entered the special discharge opening (363);
The visibility limiting means (39) is controlled on condition that a game ball is entered in the visibility limiting means (39), and at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is displayed. A visual recognition state control means (51) that enables visual recognition;
An abnormality determining means (51) for determining whether the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is the visual recognition state of the desired performance information;
The first state in which the game ball entered in the special discharge port (363) is allowed to enter the visual recognition limiting means (39), and the game ball entered in the special discharge port (363) is described above. A switching means (319B) capable of switching between a second state for restricting entry into the visual recognition restriction means (39);
The switching control unit (319B) for controlling the switching unit (319B) to the second state when the abnormality determination unit (51) determines that the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the desired visual recognition state. 51),
A gaming machine comprising:

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the visibility restricting means (39) is capable of ejecting the game ball stored when moved to the second position by the visual recognition state control means (51).

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes E1 and E2, when it is determined that the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the desired visual recognition state, the switching means is set to the second state so that the game to the visual recognition restriction means is played. Ball entry is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the game ball being inserted into the visibility limiting means. For example, when the game ball of the visibility limiting means is ejected when the visibility limiting means is moved to the second position, when the visibility limiting means cannot move to the second position where the game ball can be ejected, The game ball is prevented from entering the restricting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls that exceed the capacity from being retained in the visual-recognition limiting means and prevent the game balls from overflowing from the visual-recognition limiting means. Therefore, even when there is a drive abnormality in which the visibility limiting means is not moved from the first position, it is possible to execute the game as usual in the gaming machine.

[Appendix E3]
The switching means (319B) has a third position (standby position) that allows the game ball that has entered the special discharge opening (363) to enter the visual recognition limiting means (39), and the special discharge opening. It is movable between a fourth position (operating position) that restricts the game ball entered in (363) from entering the visual recognition limiting means (39),
The switching control means (51) moves the switching means (319B) from the third position when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visibility limiting means (39) is not at the second position. The gaming machine according to supplementary note E1 or supplementary note E2, wherein the gaming machine is moved to the fourth position.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E3, by moving the switching means from the third position to the fourth position, it is possible to restrict the game balls entered into the special discharge port from entering the visual recognition restricting means. With this, with a simple configuration and control, it is possible to limit the entry of the game ball into the visual recognition limiting means when an abnormality occurs in the visual recognition limiting means.

[Appendix E4]
The abnormality determining means (51) includes a detecting means (40B) capable of detecting that the visual recognition limiting means (39A) is in the second position,
The abnormality determining means (51) is controlled by the detection means (40B) when the visual recognition control means (51) controls the visual control means (39) to move to the second position. (39A) is not detected in the second position, it is determined that the visual recognition limiting means (39) is not in the second position, the game according to any one of the additional notes E1 to E3. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E4, it can be determined by the detection means that the visual recognition limiting means is not in the second position. Accordingly, it is possible to detect whether or not there is an abnormality in the visual recognition limiting means with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix E5]
The abnormality determining means (51) determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means (39) from the time the main power source of the gaming machine is turned on until the game can be started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes E1 to E4.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E5, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means from the time the main power source of the gaming machine is turned on until the game can be started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from starting in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the visual recognition limiting means, it is possible to deal with the abnormality.

[Appendix E6]
The abnormality determining means (51) determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means (39) after the game is started, and the abnormality is included in any of the additional notes E1 to E5. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E6, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means after the game is started. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the visual-recognition limiting means after the start of the game is enabled, the abnormality in the visual-recognition limiting means can be found and the abnormality can be dealt with.

[Appendix E7]
An abnormality occurs when the abnormality determining means (51) determines that the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the desired visual recognition state of the performance information. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E6, further comprising notifying means (341, 26) for notifying that the game is being performed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E7, when the visually recognized state of the performance information is not the intended state, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred. As a result, the game hall side can know that an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means, and it is possible to deal with the abnormality.

[Appendix E8]
Execution of a game when the abnormality determining means (51) determines that the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the visual recognition state of the desired performance information. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E7, further comprising selection means (341, 20) for enabling or disabling.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E8, it is possible to select whether or not the game can be executed when the visually recognized state of the performance information is not the intended state. With this, when there is no abnormality other than the visual-recognition limiting means and there is no problem in executing the game, it is possible to entrust the game hall side with the determination as to whether or not the player should use the game machine.

[Appendix E9]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination of whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed,
An advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting the advantage determination probability determined in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) to shift to the special game state from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. ,
Further equipped with,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E8, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E9, the performance information includes information on an advantage determination probability that greatly affects the payout performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, the payout performance is evaluated based on the information on the advantage determination probability, so that the payout performance can be suggested based on the index in which the payout performance of the gaming machine is more appropriately reflected. Further, by displaying a part or all of the information on the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player can enjoy the game by guessing the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability. The opportunity to judge whether to continue the game on the game machine based on the above is given.

[Appendix E10]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of gaming balls according to the winning hole type based on the winning of the gaming balls,
The game according to any one of appendixes E1 to E9, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one winning slot of the plurality of winning slots (313 to 316). Machine.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E10 includes performance information indicating payout performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. Therefore, the player can display some or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can change, for example, an individual difference or a secular change at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine. It is possible to estimate or recognize the payout performance in which the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the gaming machines due to the above is reflected. As a result, the player can enjoy the winning performance based on the winning opening, and if the winning performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player can continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on the performance information. Opportunity to decide whether to do is given.

[Appendix E11]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball,
The game balls enter the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls, or until the number of game balls of the game balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. Further provided is a unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations performed by the transition determination means (41) with the sphere as a trigger.
The gaming machine according to Appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E11, the performance information includes performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determination is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is performed. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal gaming state (state with low probability mode and not time saving mode). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the number of unit determinations, and thus can know the susceptibility to the transition determination. Become. As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess the number of unit determinations and have fun, and if the number of unit determinations can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine based on the number of unit determinations. Granted.

[Appendix E12]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entering, and the transfer determining unit (41) performs the transfer determination by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, which causes a specific number of playing balls to be paid out based on the entering of the playing balls. Including,
The number of payout balls of the game ball for the entry of the game ball to the first prize hole (314) and the number of the game ball to the general prize hole (313) with respect to the number of the game balls of the game ball to the game board (31) Further provided is a payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the incoming ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E12, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total payout number of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of shot balls. That is, the payout rate is an index showing the ease of winning the prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can win the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know how easy it is to do. As a result, the player has an opportunity to infer the winning rate and enjoy it, and if the winning rate can be grasped, the player has the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on the winning rate. Granted.

[Appendix E13]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls for the entry of the game balls into the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), with respect to the entering of the game balls into the variable winning port (316) A continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a ratio of a continuous character which is a ratio of the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the continuous accessory ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E13, the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio. Here, the ratio of consecutive winnings is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls for the entry of the game balls into the multiple winning openings, and the payout for entering the game balls into the variable winning openings. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous accessory ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio in the special gaming state), and the easiness of winning the variable winning a prize (the payout in the special gaming state). Rate). Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the continuous winning character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the continuous winning character ratio, so that the result of the shift determination shifts to the special game. It is possible to know the frequency (the stay ratio in the special gaming state) and the ease of winning the variable winning port. Thereby, the player can enjoy by guessing the continuous character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine in play based on the continuous character ratio. The opportunity to do is given.

[Appendix E14]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are played by the support of an electric accessory, and a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball. The ball can be entered, and the entry of the game ball in the special game state and the second winning opening (315) that gives the opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball Including possible variable winning a prize mouth (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the input of the game balls into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), with respect to the entering of the game balls into the variable winning opening (316) A character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a character ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of paid-out balls and the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-out balls of the game ball into the second winning opening (315). ,
Further equipped with,
The gaming machine according to Appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information on the character ratio calculated by the character ratio calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E14, the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total payout number, which is the total number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the entry of the game ball to the plurality of winning openings, of the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. It is the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the entered balls. That is, the accessory ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is such that the game is transferred to the special game (the stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (time saving game state) receiving the support of the electric accessory, and This is an index showing the ease of winning the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball-out rate in the special gaming state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the character ratio, and thus the frequency at which the result of the transfer determination is to transfer to the special game ( Stay ratio in special gaming state), stay ratio in support gaming state (time saving gaming state) that receives support for electric accessory, and easiness of winning in variable winning a prize port and second winning a prize port (exit in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess the character ratio and enjoy it, and if the character ratio can be grasped, an opportunity to judge whether to continue the game on the gaming machine based on the character ratio. Granted.

10: Gaming machine 313: General winning opening 314: First winning opening 315: Second winning opening 316: Variable winning opening 341: Symbol display unit 35a: Special out ball sensor 36: Clune device 363: Special out ball 364: Special Out ball passage 365: obstruction wall 367: normal entrance 368: normal passage 37a: special main display 38: sub image display 39: retention box 39A: translucency monitor 319: discharge port 319B: forced discharge member 4: Main controller 40A: Upper limit position detection sensor 40B: Lower limit position detection sensor 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
412d: Game information storage area 4A: Performance information display device 43: Performance display monitor 44: Performance display switch 45: Game set value display section 46: Set value change operation section 47: ROM
5: Voice lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

A storage unit that stores performance information that is an index indicating the payout performance,
Performance information display means for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means,
Performance information display control means for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means,
A visibility limiting unit that makes the performance information displayed on the performance information display unit invisible or difficult to view,
A visual condition control unit that controls the visual recognition limiting unit when a specific condition is satisfied and that makes at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display unit visible.
A gaming machine comprising:

Images